Dīgha Nikāya 16 Mahāparinibbānasutta Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati gijjhakūṭe pabbate.

Mahā Parinibbāna Sutta

Thus have I heard. At one time, the Blessed One was dwelling at Rajagaha, on Vulture Peak Mountain.

Tena kho pana samayena rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto vajjī abhiyātukāmo hoti.

At that time, King Ajatasattu, the son of Queen Videhi, of Magadha, was desirous of attacking the Vajjians.

So evamāha: “ahaṁ hime vajjī evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve ucchecchāmi vajjī, vināsessāmi vajjī, anayabyasanaṁ āpādessāmī”ti.

He said, I will eradicate the Vajjians, so powerful and influential; I will destroy the Vajjians, I will bring them to ruin and disaster.

Atha kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto vassakāraṁ brāhmaṇaṁ magadhamahāmattaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena bhagavato pāde sirasā vandāhi, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ puccha: ‘rājā, bhante, māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto bhagavato pāde sirasā vandati, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchatī’ti.

Then King Ajatasattu, the son of Queen Videhi, addressed his chief minister, the Brahmin Vassakara, saying, Come, Brahmin, go to the Blessed One and, on my behalf, pay homage at his feet with your head, and ask after his health, saying, The King of Magadha, Ajatasattu, the son of Queen Videhi, pays homage at the feet of the Blessed One, and asks if he is free from illness and affliction, and is living in comfort.

Evañca vadehi: ‘rājā, bhante, māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto vajjī abhiyātukāmo.

And say this: The King of Magadha, Ajatasattu, the son of Queen Videhi, wishes to attack the Vajjians.

So evamāha: “ahaṁ hime vajjī evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve ucchecchāmi vajjī, vināsessāmi vajjī, anayabyasanaṁ āpādessāmī”’ti.

He says, I will eradicate the Vajjians, so powerful and influential; I will destroy the Vajjians, I will bring them to ruin and disaster.

Yathā te bhagavā byākaroti, taṁ sādhukaṁ uggahetvā mama āroceyyāsi.

Whatever the Blessed One declares, remember it well and report it back to me.

Na hi tathāgatā vitathaṁ bhaṇantī”ti.

For the Tathagatas do not speak falsely.

1. Vassakārabrāhmaṇa “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho vassakāro brāhmaṇo magadhamahāmatto rañño māgadhassa ajātasattussa vedehiputtassa paṭissutvā bhaddāni bhaddāni yānāni yojetvā bhaddaṁ bhaddaṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhaddehi bhaddehi yānehi rājagahamhā niyyāsi, yena gijjhakūṭo pabbato tena pāyāsi.

Yes, sire, replied the Brahmin Vassakara, the chief minister of Magadha, to King Ajatasattu, the son of Queen Videhi. Having prepared a fine chariot, he mounted it and set out from Rajagaha, traveling to Vulture Peak Mountain.

When the chariot could go no further, he dismounted and approached the Blessed One on foot.

Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi, yānena gantvā, yānā paccorohitvā pattikova yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi.

Having approached, he exchanged greetings with the Blessed One, and after the exchange of friendly and courteous talk, he sat down to one side.

Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho vassakāro brāhmaṇo magadhamahāmatto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “rājā, bho gotama, māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto bhoto gotamassa pāde sirasā vandati, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchati.

Sitting there, the Brahmin Vassakara, the chief minister of Magadha, spoke to the Blessed One, saying, The King of Magadha, Ajatasattu, the son of Queen Videhi, pays homage at the feet of the Blessed One, and asks if he is free from illness and affliction, and is living in comfort.

Rājā, bho gotama, māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto vajjī abhiyātukāmo.

The King of Magadha, Ajatasattu, the son of Queen Videhi, wishes to attack the Vajjians.

So evamāha: ‘ahaṁ hime vajjī evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve ucchecchāmi vajjī, vināsessāmi vajjī, anayabyasanaṁ āpādessāmī’”ti. 2.

He says, I will eradicate the Vajjians, so powerful and influential; I will destroy the Vajjians, I will bring them to ruin and disaster.

Rājaaparihāniyadhamma Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā ānando bhagavato piṭṭhito ṭhito hoti bhagavantaṁ bījayamāno.

At that time, the Venerable Ananda was standing behind the Blessed One, fanning him.

Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “kinti te, ānanda, sutaṁ, ‘vajjī abhiṇhaṁ sannipātā sannipātabahulā’”ti?

Then the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ānanda: What have you heard, Ānanda, about the Vajjians assembling frequently and in large numbers?

“Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘vajjī abhiṇhaṁ sannipātā sannipātabahulā’”ti.

I have heard, venerable sir.

“Yāvakīvañca, ānanda, vajjī abhiṇhaṁ sannipātā sannipātabahulā bhavissanti, vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as, Ānanda, the Vajjians assemble frequently and in large numbers, growth, Ānanda, is to be expected for the Vajjians, not decline.

Kinti te, ānanda, sutaṁ, ‘vajjī samaggā sannipatanti, samaggā vuṭṭhahanti, samaggā vajjikaraṇīyāni karontī’”ti?

What have you heard, Ānanda, about the Vajjians assembling in harmony, rising in harmony, and conducting their affairs in harmony?

“Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘vajjī samaggā sannipatanti, samaggā vuṭṭhahanti, samaggā vajjikaraṇīyāni karontī’”ti. “Yāvakīvañca, ānanda, vajjī samaggā sannipatissanti, samaggā vuṭṭhahissanti, samaggā vajjikaraṇīyāni karissanti, vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni. Kinti te, ānanda, sutaṁ, ‘vajjī apaññattaṁ na paññapenti, paññattaṁ na samucchindanti, yathāpaññatte porāṇe vajjidhamme samādāya vattantī’”ti?

I have heard, venerable sir.

As long as, Ānanda, the Vajjians assemble in harmony, rise in harmony, and conduct their affairs in harmony, growth, Ānanda, is to be expected for the Vajjians, not decline.

What have you heard, Ānanda, about the Vajjians not enacting what has not been enacted, not abolishing what has been enacted, and proceeding according to the ancient Vajjian laws? I have heard, venerable sir.

“Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘vajjī apaññattaṁ na paññapenti, paññattaṁ na samucchindanti, yathāpaññatte porāṇe vajjidhamme samādāya vattantī’”ti. “Yāvakīvañca, ānanda, vajjī apaññattaṁ na paññapessanti, paññattaṁ na samucchindissanti, yathāpaññatte porāṇe vajjidhamme samādāya vattissanti, vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as, Ānanda, the Vajjians do not enact what has not been enacted, do not abolish what has been enacted, and proceed according to the ancient Vajjian laws, growth, Ānanda, is to be expected for the Vajjians, not decline.

Kinti te, ānanda, sutaṁ, ‘vajjī ye te vajjīnaṁ vajjimahallakā, te sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, tesañca sotabbaṁ maññantī’”ti?

What have you heard, Ānanda, about the Vajjians honoring, respecting, esteeming, and venerating the Vajjian elders, and considering them worthy of listening to?

“Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘vajjī ye te vajjīnaṁ vajjimahallakā, te sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, tesañca sotabbaṁ maññantī’”ti. “Yāvakīvañca, ānanda, vajjī ye te vajjīnaṁ vajjimahallakā, te sakkarissanti garuṁ karissanti mānessanti pūjessanti, tesañca sotabbaṁ maññissanti, vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

I have heard, venerable sir. As long as, Ānanda, the Vajjians honor, respect, esteem, and venerate the Vajjian elders, and consider them worthy of listening to, growth, Ānanda, is to be expected for the Vajjians, not decline.

Kinti te, ānanda, sutaṁ, ‘vajjī yā tā kulitthiyo kulakumāriyo, tā na okkassa pasayha vāsentī’”ti?

What have you heard, Ānanda, about the Vajjians not forcibly abducting women and maidens of good families?

“Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘vajjī yā tā kulitthiyo kulakumāriyo tā na okkassa pasayha vāsentī’”ti.

I have heard, venerable sir.

“Yāvakīvañca, ānanda, vajjī yā tā kulitthiyo kulakumāriyo, tā na okkassa pasayha vāsessanti, vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as, Ānanda, the Vajjians do not forcibly abduct women and maidens of good families, growth, Ānanda, is to be expected for the Vajjians, not decline.

Kinti te, ānanda, sutaṁ, ‘vajjī yāni tāni vajjīnaṁ vajjicetiyāni abbhantarāni ceva bāhirāni ca, tāni sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, tesañca dinnapubbaṁ katapubbaṁ dhammikaṁ baliṁ no parihāpentī’”ti?

What have you heard, Ānanda, about the Vajjians honoring, respecting, esteeming, and venerating the internal and external Vajjian shrines, and not neglecting the rightful offerings given and made in the past? I have heard, venerable sir.

“Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘vajjī yāni tāni vajjīnaṁ vajjicetiyāni abbhantarāni ceva bāhirāni ca, tāni sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti tesañca dinnapubbaṁ katapubbaṁ dhammikaṁ baliṁ no parihāpentī’”ti.

As long as, Ānanda, the Vajjians honor, respect, esteem, and venerate the internal and external Vajjian shrines, and do not neglect the rightful offerings given and made in the past, growth, Ānanda, is to be expected for the Vajjians, not decline.

“Yāvakīvañca, ānanda, vajjī yāni tāni vajjīnaṁ vajjicetiyāni abbhantarāni ceva bāhirāni ca, tāni sakkarissanti garuṁ karissanti mānessanti pūjessanti, tesañca dinnapubbaṁ katapubbaṁ dhammikaṁ baliṁ no parihāpessanti, vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni. Kinti te, ānanda, sutaṁ, ‘vajjīnaṁ arahantesu dhammikā rakkhāvaraṇagutti susaṁvihitā, kinti anāgatā ca arahanto vijitaṁ āgaccheyyuṁ, āgatā ca arahanto vijite phāsu vihareyyun’”ti?

How have you heard, Ānanda, that the Vajjis have established a righteous protection, defense, and security for the Arahants? How would future Arahants come to the realm, and how would those who have come dwell comfortably in the realm?

“Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante ‘vajjīnaṁ arahantesu dhammikā rakkhāvaraṇagutti susaṁvihitā kinti anāgatā ca arahanto vijitaṁ āgaccheyyuṁ, āgatā ca arahanto vijite phāsu vihareyyun’”ti.

I have heard, venerable sir, that the Vajjis have established a righteous protection, defense, and security for the Arahants. How would future Arahants come to the realm, and how would those who have come dwell comfortably in the realm?

“Yāvakīvañca, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ arahantesu dhammikā rakkhāvaraṇagutti susaṁvihitā bhavissati, kinti anāgatā ca arahanto vijitaṁ āgaccheyyuṁ, āgatā ca arahanto vijite phāsu vihareyyunti.

As long as, Ānanda, the Vajjis have established a righteous protection, defense, and security for the Arahants, how would future Arahants come to the realm, and how would those who have come dwell comfortably in the realm?

Vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānī”ti.

Growth, Ānanda, is to be expected for the Vajjis, not decline.

Atha kho bhagavā vassakāraṁ brāhmaṇaṁ magadhamahāmattaṁ āmantesi: “ekamidāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, samayaṁ vesāliyaṁ viharāmi sārandade cetiye.

Then the Blessed One addressed Vassakāra, the Brahmin, the chief minister of Magadha: Once, Brahmin, I was staying at Vesālī in the Sārandada Shrine.

Tatrāhaṁ vajjīnaṁ ime satta aparihāniye dhamme desesiṁ.

There I taught the Vajjis these seven principles of non-decline.

Yāvakīvañca, brāhmaṇa, ime satta aparihāniyā dhammā vajjīsu ṭhassanti, imesu ca sattasu aparihāniyesu dhammesu vajjī sandississanti, vuddhiyeva, brāhmaṇa, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānī”ti.

As long as, Brahmin, these seven principles of non-decline remain among the Vajjis, and the Vajjis are seen practicing these seven principles of non-decline, growth, Brahmin, is to be expected for the Vajjis, not decline.

Evaṁ vutte, vassakāro brāhmaṇo magadhamahāmatto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ekamekenapi, bho gotama, aparihāniyena dhammena samannāgatānaṁ vajjīnaṁ vuddhiyeva pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

Having said this, Vassakāra, the Brahmin, the chief minister of Magadha, said to the Blessed One: Even if the Vajjis possess just one principle of non-decline, growth is to be expected for them, not decline.

Ko pana vādo sattahi aparihāniyehi dhammehi.

What to say of possessing all seven principles of non-decline?

Akaraṇīyāva, bho gotama, vajjī raññā māgadhena ajātasattunā vedehiputtena yadidaṁ yuddhassa, aññatra upalāpanāya aññatra mithubhedā.

The Vajjis cannot be overcome by King Ajātasattu, the son of Queen Videhi, in battle, except through internal discord and division.

Handa ca dāni mayaṁ, bho gotama, gacchāma, bahukiccā mayaṁ bahukaraṇīyā”ti.

Now, Master Gotama, we must go, for we have many duties and much to do.

“Yassadāni tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, kālaṁ maññasī”ti.

Now, Brahmin, you may go at your own convenience.

Atha kho vassakāro brāhmaṇo magadhamahāmatto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi. 3.

Then Vassakāra, the Brahmin, the chief minister of Magadha, rejoiced in and approved of the Blessed One's words, and rising from his seat, departed.

Bhikkhuaparihāniyadhamma Atha kho bhagavā acirapakkante vassakāre brāhmaṇe magadhamahāmatte āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “gaccha tvaṁ, ānanda, yāvatikā bhikkhū rājagahaṁ upanissāya viharanti, te sabbe upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ sannipātehī”ti.

The Principles of Non-Decline for the Disciples Then, after Vassakāra, the Brahmin, the chief minister of Magadha, had departed, the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ānanda: Go, Ānanda, and gather all the disciples residing in Rājagaha in the assembly hall.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā yāvatikā bhikkhū rājagahaṁ upanissāya viharanti, te sabbe upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ sannipātetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied the Venerable Ānanda, and having gathered all the disciples residing in Rājagaha in the assembly hall, he approached the Blessed One. Having approached, he paid homage to the Blessed One and stood to one side.

Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sannipatito, bhante, bhikkhusaṅgho, yassadāni, bhante, bhagavā kālaṁ maññatī”ti.

Standing to one side, the Venerable Ānanda said to the Blessed One: Venerable sir, the assembly of disciples has gathered. Now, venerable sir, may the Blessed One do as he sees fit.

Atha kho bhagavā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena upaṭṭhānasālā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi.

Then the Blessed One rose from his seat and went to the assembly hall. Having arrived, he sat down on the prepared seat.

Nisajja kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “satta vo, bhikkhave, aparihāniye dhamme desessāmi, taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.

Seated, the Blessed One addressed the disciples: Disciples, I will teach you seven conditions for non-decline. Listen carefully, pay close attention, and I will speak.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ.

Yes, venerable sir, the disciples replied to the Blessed One.

Bhagavā etadavoca: “Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū abhiṇhaṁ sannipātā sannipātabahulā bhavissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

The Blessed One said this: As long as the disciples gather frequently and in large numbers, growth can be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū samaggā sannipatissanti, samaggā vuṭṭhahissanti, samaggā saṅghakaraṇīyāni karissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as the disciples meet in harmony, disperse in harmony, and conduct Sangha business in harmony, growth can be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū apaññattaṁ na paññapessanti, paññattaṁ na samucchindissanti, yathāpaññattesu sikkhāpadesu samādāya vattissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as the disciples do not establish what has not been established, do not abolish what has been established, and practice in accordance with the established training rules, growth can be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū ye te bhikkhū therā rattaññū cirapabbajitā saṅghapitaro saṅghapariṇāyakā, te sakkarissanti garuṁ karissanti mānessanti pūjessanti, tesañca sotabbaṁ maññissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as the disciples honor, respect, revere, and venerate the elder disciples, those long gone forth, the fathers of the Sangha, the leaders of the Sangha, and consider them worth listening to, growth can be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū uppannāya taṇhāya ponobbhavikāya na vasaṁ gacchissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni. Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū āraññakesu senāsanesu sāpekkhā bhavissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as the disciples do not fall under the influence of craving that leads to renewed existence, growth can be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū paccattaññeva satiṁ upaṭṭhapessanti: ‘kinti anāgatā ca pesalā sabrahmacārī āgaccheyyuṁ, āgatā ca pesalā sabrahmacārī phāsu vihareyyun’ti. Vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as the disciples are fond of living in the forest dwellings, growth can be expected for the disciples, not decline. As long as the disciples establish mindfulness within themselves, growth can be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, ime satta aparihāniyā dhammā bhikkhūsu ṭhassanti, imesu ca sattasu aparihāniyesu dhammesu bhikkhū sandississanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as these seven conditions for non-decline remain among the disciples, and as long as the disciples are seen practicing these seven conditions for non-decline, growth can be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Aparepi vo, bhikkhave, satta aparihāniye dhamme desessāmi, taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.

I will teach you another seven conditions for non-decline. Listen carefully, pay close attention, and I will speak.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ.

Yes, venerable sir, the disciples replied to the Blessed One.

Bhagavā etadavoca: “Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na kammārāmā bhavissanti na kammaratā na kammārāmatamanuyuttā, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

The Blessed One said this: As long as the disciples do not delight in work, are not fond of work, and are not engaged in work, growth can be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na bhassārāmā bhavissanti na bhassaratā na bhassārāmatamanuyuttā, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as the disciples do not delight in idle talk, are not fond of idle talk, and do not engage in idle talk, growth is to be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na niddārāmā bhavissanti na niddāratā na niddārāmatamanuyuttā, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as the disciples do not delight in sleep, are not fond of sleep, and do not engage in sleep, growth is to be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na saṅgaṇikārāmā bhavissanti na saṅgaṇikaratā na saṅgaṇikārāmatamanuyuttā, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as the disciples do not delight in socializing, are not fond of socializing, and do not engage in socializing, growth is to be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na pāpicchā bhavissanti na pāpikānaṁ icchānaṁ vasaṁ gatā, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as the disciples do not have unwholesome desires and are not led by unwholesome desires, growth is to be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na pāpamittā bhavissanti na pāpasahāyā na pāpasampavaṅkā, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as the disciples do not associate with bad friends, are not companions of the wicked, and do not follow the wicked, growth is to be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na oramattakena visesādhigamena antarāvosānaṁ āpajjissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as the disciples do not fall into complacency due to a minor attainment, growth is to be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, ime satta aparihāniyā dhammā bhikkhūsu ṭhassanti, imesu ca sattasu aparihāniyesu dhammesu bhikkhū sandississanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as these seven non-declining qualities remain among the disciples, and the disciples are seen in these seven non-declining qualities, growth is to be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Aparepi vo, bhikkhave, satta aparihāniye dhamme desessāmi …pe….

Furthermore I will teach you seven more non-declining qualities...

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū saddhā bhavissanti …pe…

As long as the disciples have faith...

hirimanā bhavissanti …

are conscientious...

ottappī bhavissanti …

are fearful of wrongdoing...

bahussutā bhavissanti …

are learned...

āraddhavīriyā bhavissanti …

are energetic...

upaṭṭhitassatī bhavissanti …

have mindfulness established...

paññavanto bhavissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

are wise, growth is to be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, ime satta aparihāniyā dhammā bhikkhūsu ṭhassanti, imesu ca sattasu aparihāniyesu dhammesu bhikkhū sandississanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as these seven non-declining qualities remain among the disciples, and the disciples are seen in these seven non-declining qualities, growth is to be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Aparepi vo, bhikkhave, satta aparihāniye dhamme desessāmi, taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.

Furthermore I will teach you seven more non-declining qualities, listen to it, pay close attention, I will speak.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ.

Yes, venerable sir, those disciples replied to the Blessed One.

Bhagavā etadavoca: “Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu satisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāvessanti …pe…

The Blessed One said this: As long as the disciples develop the mindfulness enlightenment factor...

dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāvessanti …

the investigation of states enlightenment factor...

vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāvessanti …

the energy enlightenment factor...

pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāvessanti …

the pīti enlightenment factor...

passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāvessanti …

the tranquility enlightenment factor...

samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāvessanti …

They will develop the enlightenment factor of concentration...

upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāvessanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

they will develop the enlightenment factor of equanimity. Growth, indeed is to be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, ime satta aparihāniyā dhammā bhikkhūsu ṭhassanti, imesu ca sattasu aparihāniyesu dhammesu bhikkhū sandississanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā no parihāni.

As long as these seven non-declining qualities remain among the disciples, and as long as the disciples are seen in these seven non-declining qualities, growth, indeed is to be expected, not decline.

Aparepi vo, bhikkhave, satta aparihāniye dhamme desessāmi, taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.

I will teach you seven more non-declining qualities. Listen to that, pay close attention, I will speak.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ.

Yes, venerable sir, those disciples replied to the Blessed One.

Bhagavā etadavoca: “Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū aniccasaññaṁ bhāvessanti …pe…

The Blessed One said this: As long as the disciples develop the perception of impermanence...

anattasaññaṁ bhāvessanti …

develop the perception of non-self...

asubhasaññaṁ bhāvessanti …

develop the perception of unattractiveness...

ādīnavasaññaṁ bhāvessanti …

develop the perception of danger...

pahānasaññaṁ bhāvessanti …

develop the perception of abandonment...

virāgasaññaṁ bhāvessanti …

develop the perception of dispassion...

nirodhasaññaṁ bhāvessanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

develop the perception of cessation, growth, indeed is to be expected, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, ime satta aparihāniyā dhammā bhikkhūsu ṭhassanti, imesu ca sattasu aparihāniyesu dhammesu bhikkhū sandississanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as these seven non-declining qualities remain among the disciples, and as long as the disciples are seen in these seven non-declining qualities, growth, indeed is to be expected, not decline.

Cha vo, bhikkhave, aparihāniye dhamme desessāmi, taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.

I will teach you six non-declining qualities. Listen to that, pay close attention, I will speak.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ.

Yes, venerable sir, those disciples replied to the Blessed One.

Bhagavā etadavoca: “Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhāpessanti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

The Blessed One said this: As long as the disciples establish goodwill in bodily actions, both openly and privately, among their fellow practitioners, growth, indeed is to be expected, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ paccupaṭṭhāpessanti …pe…

As long as the disciples establish goodwill in verbal actions...

mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhāpessanti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

establish goodwill in mental actions, both openly and privately, among their fellow practitioners, growth, indeed is to be expected, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū, ye te lābhā dhammikā dhammaladdhā antamaso pattapariyāpannamattampi tathārūpehi lābhehi appaṭivibhattabhogī bhavissanti sīlavantehi sabrahmacārīhi sādhāraṇabhogī, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as the disciples, whatever rightful gains they receive, even as little as what fits in the bowl, share those gains without reservation with virtuous fellow practitioners, growth, indeed is to be expected, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññūpasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṁvattanikāni tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagatā viharissanti sabrahmacārīhi āvi ceva raho ca, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as the disciples live in harmony with their fellow practitioners, both openly and privately, in those virtues that are unbroken, untorn, unblemished, unspotted, liberating, praised by the wise, not grasped at, conducive to concentration, growth, indeed is to be expected, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū yāyaṁ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā, niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagatā viharissanti sabrahmacārīhi āvi ceva raho ca, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.

As long as the disciples dwell in the noble view that leads to liberation, which leads the practitioner to the complete cessation of suffering, and they live in harmony with their fellow practitioners, both openly and privately, growth is to be expected for the disciples, not decline.

Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, ime cha aparihāniyā dhammā bhikkhūsu ṭhassanti, imesu ca chasu aparihāniyesu dhammesu bhikkhū sandississanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānī”ti.

As long as these six principles of non-decline remain among the disciples, and the disciples are seen practicing these six principles of non-decline, growth is to be expected for the disciples, not decline.

(…) Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharanto gijjhakūṭe pabbate etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti: “iti sīlaṁ, iti samādhi, iti paññā.

At that time, the Blessed One, while residing at Rajagaha on Vulture Peak Mountain, frequently gave a discourse to the disciples on the Dhamma, saying: Such is virtue, such is concentration, such is wisdom.

Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso.

Concentration developed through virtue is of great fruit and benefit.

Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā.

Wisdom developed through concentration is of great fruit and benefit.

Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti.

The mind developed through wisdom is completely liberated from the taints, namely, the taint of sense satisfaction, the taint of becoming, and the taint of ignorance.

Atha kho bhagavā rājagahe yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena ambalaṭṭhikā tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

Then the Blessed One, having stayed at Rajagaha as long as he wished, addressed the Venerable Ananda: Come, Ananda, let us go to Ambalatthika.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied the Venerable Ananda to the Blessed One.

Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena ambalaṭṭhikā tadavasari.

Then the Blessed One, together with a large community of disciples, arrived at Ambalatthika.

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ viharati rājāgārake.

There, the Blessed One resided at the royal park in Ambalatthika.

Tatrāpi sudaṁ bhagavā ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ viharanto rājāgārake etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti: “iti sīlaṁ iti samādhi iti paññā.

While residing there, he frequently gave a discourse to the disciples on the Dhamma, saying: Such is virtue, such is concentration, such is wisdom.

Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso.

Concentration developed through virtue is of great fruit and benefit.

Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā.

Wisdom developed through concentration is of great fruit and benefit.

Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti.

The mind developed through wisdom is completely liberated from the taints, namely, the taint of sense satisfaction, the taint of becoming, and the taint of ignorance.

Atha kho bhagavā ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena nāḷandā tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

Then the Blessed One, having stayed at Ambalatthika as long as he wished, addressed the Venerable Ananda: Come, Ananda, let us go to Nalanda.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied the Venerable Ananda to the Blessed One.

Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena nāḷandā tadavasari, tatra sudaṁ bhagavā nāḷandāyaṁ viharati pāvārikambavane.

Then the Blessed One, together with a large community of disciples, arrived at Nalanda, where he resided in Pavarika's mango grove.

4. Sāriputtasīhanāda Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Then the Venerable Sariputta approached the Blessed One, and having approached, he paid homage to the Blessed One and sat down to one side.

Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati; na cāhu na ca bhavissati na cetarahi vijjati añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro yadidaṁ sambodhiyan”ti.

Sitting to one side, the Venerable Sariputta said to the Blessed One: I have such confidence, venerable sir, in the Blessed One.

There neither was, nor will there be, nor is there now, another ascetic or brahmin more knowingable than the Blessed One in terms of enlightenment.

“Uḷārā kho te ayaṁ, sāriputta, āsabhī vācā bhāsitā, ekaṁso gahito, sīhanādo nadito: ‘evaṁpasanno ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati; na cāhu na ca bhavissati na cetarahi vijjati añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro yadidaṁ sambodhiyan’ti.

This is indeed a bold and confident statement, Sāriputta, a declaration made with certainty, a lion's roar: I am thus convinced, venerable sir, in the Blessed One; there neither was, nor will there be, nor is there now, another ascetic or brahmin more knowingable than the Blessed One in terms of enlightenment.

Kiṁ te, sāriputta, ye te ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, sabbe te bhagavanto cetasā ceto paricca viditā: ‘evaṁsīlā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁdhammā evaṁpaññā evaṁvihārī evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipī’”ti?

What do you think, Sāriputta, regarding those Arahants, perfectly enlightened Tathāgatas of the past, were all those Blessed Ones known to you through the mind, having known them with the mind, as being of such virtue, such teaching, such wisdom, such dwelling, such liberation?

“No hetaṁ, bhante”.

No, venerable sir.

“Kiṁ pana te, sāriputta, ye te bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, sabbe te bhagavanto cetasā ceto paricca viditā: ‘evaṁsīlā te bhagavanto bhavissanti itipi, evaṁdhammā evaṁpaññā evaṁvihārī evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto bhavissanti itipī’”ti?

And what about those Arahants, perfectly enlightened Tathāgatas of the future, will all those Blessed Ones be known to you through the mind, having known them with the mind, as being of such virtue, such teaching, such wisdom, such dwelling, such liberation?

“No hetaṁ, bhante”.

No, venerable sir.

“Kiṁ pana te, sāriputta, ahaṁ etarahi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho cetasā ceto paricca vidito: ‘evaṁsīlo bhagavā itipi, evaṁdhammo evaṁpañño evaṁvihārī evaṁvimutto bhagavā itipī’”ti?

And what about me, Sāriputta, the Arahant, perfectly enlightened Tathāgata of the present, am I known to you through the mind, having known me with the mind, as being of such virtue, such teaching, such wisdom, such dwelling, such liberation?

“No hetaṁ, bhante”.

No, venerable sir.

“Ettha ca hi te, sāriputta, atītānāgatapaccuppannesu arahantesu sammāsambuddhesu cetopariyañāṇaṁ natthi.

In this case, Sāriputta, you do not have the knowing of the minds of the Arahants, perfectly enlightened Tathāgatas of the past, future, and present.

Atha kiñcarahi te ayaṁ, sāriputta, uḷārā āsabhī vācā bhāsitā, ekaṁso gahito, sīhanādo nadito: ‘evaṁpasanno ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati; na cāhu na ca bhavissati na cetarahi vijjati añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro yadidaṁ sambodhiyan’”ti?

Then why, Sāriputta, do you make such a bold and confident statement, a declaration made with certainty, a lion's roar: I am thus convinced, venerable sir, in the Blessed One; there neither was, nor will there be, nor is there now, another ascetic or brahmin more knowingable than the Blessed One in terms of enlightenment.

“Na kho me, bhante, atītānāgatapaccuppannesu arahantesu sammāsambuddhesu cetopariyañāṇaṁ atthi, api ca me dhammanvayo vidito.

I do not have, venerable sir, the knowing of the minds of the Arahants, perfectly enlightened Tathāgatas of the past, future, and present, but I have known the lineage of the Dhamma.

Seyyathāpi, bhante, rañño paccantimaṁ nagaraṁ daḷhuddhāpaṁ daḷhapākāratoraṇaṁ ekadvāraṁ, tatrassa dovāriko paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī aññātānaṁ nivāretā ñātānaṁ pavesetā.

Just as, venerable sir, a king's frontier city, well-fortified, with strong walls and a single gate, has a wise, competent, and intelligent gatekeeper who keeps out strangers and lets in those he knows.

So tassa nagarassa samantā anupariyāyapathaṁ anukkamamāno na passeyya pākārasandhiṁ vā pākāravivaraṁ vā, antamaso biḷāranikkhamanamattampi.

As he surveys the path around the city, he does not see a gap in the walls or a hole, not even a space for a cat to slip through.

Tassa evamassa: ‘ye kho keci oḷārikā pāṇā imaṁ nagaraṁ pavisanti vā nikkhamanti vā, sabbe te imināva dvārena pavisanti vā nikkhamanti vā’ti. Evameva kho me, bhante, dhammanvayo vidito: ‘ye te, bhante, ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, sabbe te bhagavanto pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu supatiṭṭhitacittā sattabojjhaṅge yathābhūtaṁ bhāvetvā anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambujjhiṁsu.

He would conclude, Whatever large creatures enter or leave this city, they all do so through this gate.

Just as, venerable sir, I have known the path of the Dhamma, so too, venerable sir, in the past there were arahants, perfectly enlightened Tathāgatas, all those Blessed Ones, having abandoned the five hindrances, the defilements of the mind that weaken wisdom, with minds well established in the four dwellings of mindfulness, having developed the seven factors of enlightenment as they truly are, fully awakened to unsurpassed perfect enlightenment.

Yepi te, bhante, bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, sabbe te bhagavanto pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu supatiṭṭhitacittā satta bojjhaṅge yathābhūtaṁ bhāvetvā anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambujjhissanti.

And those, venerable sir, who will be arahants, perfectly enlightened Tathāgatas in the future, all those Blessed Ones, having abandoned the five hindrances, the defilements of the mind that weaken wisdom, with minds well established in the four dwellings of mindfulness, having developed the seven factors of enlightenment as they truly are, will fully awaken to unsurpassed perfect enlightenment.

Bhagavāpi, bhante, etarahi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu supatiṭṭhitacitto satta bojjhaṅge yathābhūtaṁ bhāvetvā anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambuddho’”ti.

The Blessed One, venerable sir, who is now an arahant, perfectly enlightened Tathāgata, having abandoned the five hindrances, the defilements of the mind that weaken wisdom, with a mind well established in the four dwellings of mindfulness, having developed the seven factors of enlightenment as they truly are, is fully awakened to unsurpassed perfect enlightenment.

Tatrapi sudaṁ bhagavā nāḷandāyaṁ viharanto pāvārikambavane etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti: “iti sīlaṁ, iti samādhi, iti paññā.

At that time, the Blessed One, while dwelling at Nāḷandā in Pāvārika's mango grove, frequently gave a Dhamma talk to the disciples on this very subject: Such is virtue, such is concentration, such is wisdom.

Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso.

Concentration developed through virtue is of great fruit and benefit.

Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā.

Wisdom developed through concentration is of great fruit and benefit.

Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti. 5. Dussīlaādīnava Atha kho bhagavā nāḷandāyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena pāṭaligāmo tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

The mind developed through wisdom is completely liberated from the taints, namely, the taint of sense satisfaction, the taint of becoming, and the taint of ignorance.

Then the Blessed One, having stayed at Nāḷandā as long as he wished, addressed the venerable Ānanda: Come, Ānanda, let us go to Pāṭaligāma.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, venerable sir, the venerable Ānanda replied to the Blessed One.

Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena pāṭaligāmo tadavasari.

Then the Blessed One, together with a large community of disciples, went to Pāṭaligāma.

Assosuṁ kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā: “bhagavā kira pāṭaligāmaṁ anuppatto”ti.

The lay followers of Pāṭaligāma heard of this.

Atha kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

Then the lay followers of Pāṭaligāma approached the Blessed One, and having approached, they paid homage to the Blessed One and sat down to one side.

Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “adhivāsetu no, bhante, bhagavā āvasathāgāran”ti.

Sitting to one side, the lay followers of Pāṭaligāma said to the Blessed One: May the Blessed One consent to stay in our guesthouse.

Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

The Blessed One consented by remaining silent.

Atha kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena āvasathāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā sabbasanthariṁ āvasathāgāraṁ santharitvā āsanāni paññapetvā udakamaṇikaṁ patiṭṭhāpetvā telapadīpaṁ āropetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu.

Then the lay followers of Pāṭaligāma, knowing the Blessed Ones consent, rose from their seats, paid homage to the Blessed One, and, keeping him to their right, went to the guesthouse. Having gone there, they prepared the entire guesthouse, set up seats, placed a water pot, and lit an oil lamp.

Then they approached the Blessed One, and having approached, they paid homage to the Blessed One and stood to one side.

Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “sabbasantharisanthataṁ, bhante, āvasathāgāraṁ, āsanāni paññattāni, udakamaṇiko patiṭṭhāpito, telapadīpo āropito; yassadāni, bhante, bhagavā kālaṁ maññatī”ti.

Standing to one side, the lay followers of Pāṭaligāma said to the Blessed One: All is prepared, venerable sir, the dwelling place is spread with coverings, seats are arranged, a water vessel is set up, and an oil lamp is lit; now, venerable sir, whenever the Blessed One considers it the right time.

Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena āvasathāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā pāde pakkhāletvā āvasathāgāraṁ pavisitvā majjhimaṁ thambhaṁ nissāya puratthābhimukho nisīdi.

Then the Blessed One, in the evening, having dressed and taken his bowl and robe, went with the community of disciples to the dwelling place. Having arrived, he washed his feet, entered the dwelling, and sat down facing east, leaning against the central pillar.

Bhikkhusaṅghopi kho pāde pakkhāletvā āvasathāgāraṁ pavisitvā pacchimaṁ bhittiṁ nissāya puratthābhimukho nisīdi bhagavantameva purakkhatvā.

The community of disciples also washed their feet, entered the dwelling, and sat down facing east, leaning against the western wall, with the Blessed One in front of them.

Pāṭaligāmikāpi kho upāsakā pāde pakkhāletvā āvasathāgāraṁ pavisitvā puratthimaṁ bhittiṁ nissāya pacchimābhimukhā nisīdiṁsu bhagavantameva purakkhatvā.

The lay followers of Pāṭaligāma also washed their feet, entered the dwelling, and sat down facing west, leaning against the eastern wall, with the Blessed One in front of them.

(…) Atha kho bhagavā pāṭaligāmike upāsake āmantesi: “pañcime, gahapatayo, ādīnavā dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

Then the Blessed One addressed the lay followers of Pāṭaligāma: Householders, there are these five dangers for one of bad conduct, of moral failure.

Katame pañca?

What are the five?

Idha, gahapatayo, dussīlo sīlavipanno pamādādhikaraṇaṁ mahatiṁ bhogajāniṁ nigacchati.

Here, householders, one of bad conduct, of moral failure, through negligence, encounters great loss of wealth.

Ayaṁ paṭhamo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

This is the first danger for one of bad conduct, of moral failure.

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, dussīlassa sīlavipannassa pāpako kittisaddo abbhuggacchati.

Furthermore, householders, one of bad conduct, of moral failure, a bad reputation spreads about him.

Ayaṁ dutiyo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

This is the second danger for one of bad conduct, of moral failure.

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, dussīlo sīlavipanno yaññadeva parisaṁ upasaṅkamati—yadi khattiyaparisaṁ yadi brāhmaṇaparisaṁ yadi gahapatiparisaṁ yadi samaṇaparisaṁ—avisārado upasaṅkamati maṅkubhūto.

Furthermore, householders, one of bad conduct, of moral failure, whenever he approaches an assembly: whether it be of nobles, brahmins, householders, or ascetics: he approaches it timidly and ashamed.

Ayaṁ tatiyo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

This is the third danger for one of bad conduct, of moral failure.

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, dussīlo sīlavipanno sammūḷho kālaṁ karoti.

Furthermore, householders, one of bad conduct, of moral failure, dies confused.

Ayaṁ catuttho ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

This is the fourth danger for one of bad conduct, of moral failure.

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, dussīlo sīlavipanno kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati.

Furthermore, householders, one of bad conduct, of moral failure, upon the breaking up of the body, after death, is reborn in a state of woe, a bad destination, a lower realm, hell.

Ayaṁ pañcamo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

This is the fifth danger for one of bad conduct, of moral failure.

Ime kho, gahapatayo, pañca ādīnavā dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā. 6.

These, householders, are the five dangers for one of bad conduct, of moral failure.

Sīlavantaānisaṁsa Pañcime, gahapatayo, ānisaṁsā sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

There are these five benefits for one of good conduct, of moral accomplishment.

Katame pañca?

What are the five?

Idha, gahapatayo, sīlavā sīlasampanno appamādādhikaraṇaṁ mahantaṁ bhogakkhandhaṁ adhigacchati.

Here, householders, one of good conduct, of moral accomplishment, through diligence, attains great wealth.

Ayaṁ paṭhamo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

This is the first benefit for one of good conduct, of moral accomplishment.

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, sīlavato sīlasampannassa kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchati.

Furthermore, householders, one of good conduct, of moral accomplishment, a good reputation spreads about him.

Ayaṁ dutiyo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

This is the second benefit for one of good conduct, of moral accomplishment.

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, sīlavā sīlasampanno yaññadeva parisaṁ upasaṅkamati—yadi khattiyaparisaṁ yadi brāhmaṇaparisaṁ yadi gahapatiparisaṁ yadi samaṇaparisaṁ visārado upasaṅkamati amaṅkubhūto.

Furthermore, householders, one of good conduct, of moral accomplishment, whenever he approaches an assembly: whether it be of nobles, brahmins, householders, or ascetics: he approaches it confidently and unashamed.

Ayaṁ tatiyo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

This is the third benefit of a virtuous person, of the accomplishment of virtue.

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, sīlavā sīlasampanno asammūḷho kālaṁ karoti.

Furthermore, householders, a virtuous person, accomplished in virtue, passes away without confusion.

Ayaṁ catuttho ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

This is the fourth benefit of a virtuous person, of the accomplishment of virtue.

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, sīlavā sīlasampanno kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati.

Furthermore, householders, a virtuous person, accomplished in virtue, upon the breaking up of the body after death, is reborn in a good destination, in the heavenly world.

Ayaṁ pañcamo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

This is the fifth benefit of a virtuous person, of the accomplishment of virtue.

Ime kho, gahapatayo, pañca ānisaṁsā sīlavato sīlasampadāyā”ti.

These, householders, are the five benefits of a virtuous person, of the accomplishment of virtue.

Atha kho bhagavā pāṭaligāmike upāsake bahudeva rattiṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uyyojesi: “abhikkantā kho, gahapatayo, ratti, yassadāni tumhe kālaṁ maññathā”ti.

Then the Blessed One, having instructed, inspired, roused, and gladdened the lay followers of Pāṭaligāma with a Dhamma talk for much of the night, dismissed them, saying, The night is far spent, householders. You may go at your convenience.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā bhagavato paṭissutvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkamiṁsu.

Yes, venerable sir, the lay followers of Pāṭaligāma replied to the Blessed One, and after rising from their seats, they paid homage to the Blessed One, circumambulated him, and departed.

Atha kho bhagavā acirapakkantesu pāṭaligāmikesu upāsakesu suññāgāraṁ pāvisi. 7.

Then the Blessed One, shortly after the lay followers of Pāṭaligāma had departed, entered an empty dwelling.

Pāṭaliputtanagaramāpana Tena kho pana samayena sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā pāṭaligāme nagaraṁ māpenti vajjīnaṁ paṭibāhāya.

At that time, Sunidha and Vassakāra, the chief ministers of Magadha, were constructing a city at Pāṭaligāma to repel the Vajjis.

Tena samayena sambahulā devatāyo sahasseva pāṭaligāme vatthūni pariggaṇhanti.

At that time, many deities were surveying plots of land at Pāṭaligāma.

Yasmiṁ padese mahesakkhā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, mahesakkhānaṁ tattha raññaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ.

In the places where powerful deities surveyed plots, the minds of kings and royal ministers inclined to build residences there.

Yasmiṁ padese majjhimā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, majjhimānaṁ tattha raññaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ.

In the places where middling deities surveyed plots, the minds of kings and royal ministers inclined to build residences there.

Yasmiṁ padese nīcā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, nīcānaṁ tattha raññaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ.

In the places where lesser deities surveyed plots, the minds of kings and royal ministers inclined to build residences there.

Addasā kho bhagavā dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena tā devatāyo sahasseva pāṭaligāme vatthūni pariggaṇhantiyo.

The Blessed One, with his divine eye, purified and surpassing the human, saw those deities, thousands of them, surveying plots of land at Pāṭaligāma.

Atha kho bhagavā rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhāya āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “Ke nu kho, ānanda, pāṭaligāme nagaraṁ māpentī”ti?

Then, at the break of dawn, the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ānanda, Who, Ānanda, is constructing a city at Pāṭaligāma?

“Sunidhavassakārā, bhante, magadhamahāmattā pāṭaligāme nagaraṁ māpenti vajjīnaṁ paṭibāhāyā”ti.

Sunidha and Vassakāra, venerable sir, the chief ministers of Magadha, are constructing a city at Pāṭaligāma to repel the Vajjis.

“Seyyathāpi, ānanda, devehi tāvatiṁsehi saddhiṁ mantetvā; evameva kho, ānanda, sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā pāṭaligāme nagaraṁ māpenti vajjīnaṁ paṭibāhāya.

Just as, Ānanda, they are consulting with the Tāvatiṁsa gods, so too, Ānanda, Sunidha and Vassakāra, the chief ministers of Magadha, are constructing a city at Pāṭaligāma to repel the Vajjis.

Idhāhaṁ, ānanda, addasaṁ dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena sambahulā devatāyo sahasseva pāṭaligāme vatthūni pariggaṇhantiyo.

Here, Ānanda, I saw with my divine eye, purified and surpassing the human, many deities, thousands of them, surveying plots of land at Pāṭaligāma.

Yasmiṁ, ānanda, padese mahesakkhā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, mahesakkhānaṁ tattha raññaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ.

In the region, Ānanda, where powerful deities survey the grounds, the minds of the kings and royal ministers incline towards constructing residences there.

Yasmiṁ padese majjhimā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, majjhimānaṁ tattha raññaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ.

In the region where middling deities survey the grounds, the minds of the kings and royal ministers incline towards constructing residences there.

Yasmiṁ padese nīcā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, nīcānaṁ tattha raññaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ.

In the region where lesser deities survey the grounds, the minds of the kings and royal ministers incline towards constructing residences there.

Yāvatā, ānanda, ariyaṁ āyatanaṁ yāvatā vaṇippatho idaṁ agganagaraṁ bhavissati pāṭaliputtaṁ puṭabhedanaṁ.

As far as the noble domain extends, as far as the trade route reaches, this will be the chief city, Pāṭaliputta, the breaker of pots.

Pāṭaliputtassa kho, ānanda, tayo antarāyā bhavissanti— aggito vā udakato vā mithubhedā vā”ti.

Ānanda, Pāṭaliputta will face three dangers: fire, water, or internal discord.

Atha kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu, ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “adhivāsetu no bhavaṁ gotamo ajjatanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

Then, Sunidha and Vassakāra, the chief ministers of Magadha, approached the Blessed One. Having approached, they exchanged greetings with the Blessed One, and after exchanging courteous and friendly talk, they stood to one side. Standing to one side, Sunidha and Vassakāra, the chief ministers of Magadha, said to the Blessed One, May Master Gotama consent to our meal today, along with the community of disciples.

Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

The Blessed One consented by remaining silent.

Atha kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā yena sako āvasatho tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā sake āvasathe paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesuṁ: “kālo, bho gotama, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

Then, Sunidha and Vassakāra, knowing the Blessed One's consent, went to their own residence. Having gone there, they prepared excellent food and drink and informed the Blessed One of the time, saying, It is time, Master Gotama, the meal is ready.

Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena sunidhavassakārānaṁ magadhamahāmattānaṁ āvasatho tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi.

Then, in the morning, the Blessed One dressed, took his bowl and robe, and went with the community of disciples to the residence of Sunidha and Vassakāra, the chief ministers of Magadha. Having gone there, he sat down on the prepared seat.

Atha kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesuṁ sampavāresuṁ.

Then, Sunidha and Vassakāra, the chief ministers of Magadha, with their own hands, served and satisfied the community of disciples headed by the Tathāgata with excellent food and drink.

Atha kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

When Sunidha and Vassakāra, the chief ministers of Magadha, saw that the Blessed One had finished eating and had put away his bowl, they took a low seat and sat down to one side.

Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho sunidhavassakāre magadhamahāmatte bhagavā imāhi gāthāhi anumodi: “Yasmiṁ padese kappeti, vāsaṁ paṇḍitajātiyo; Sīlavantettha bhojetvā, saññate brahmacārayo.

When Sunidha and Vassakāra, the chief ministers of Magadha, were seated to one side, the Blessed One expressed his appreciation with these verses: In whatever region the wise ones dwell,

Having fed the virtuous and restrained celibates,

The deities who are there,

Yā tattha devatā āsuṁ, tāsaṁ dakkhiṇamādise; Tā pūjitā pūjayanti, mānitā mānayanti naṁ.

They direct their offerings to them. Those who are honored, honor in return,

Those who are respected, respect in return.

Tato naṁ anukampanti, mātā puttaṁva orasaṁ; Devatānukampito poso, sadā bhadrāni passatī”ti.

Then they show compassion,

Like a mother to her own child. A person favored by the deities

Always sees auspicious things.

Atha kho bhagavā sunidhavassakāre magadhamahāmatte imāhi gāthāhi anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

Then the Blessed One, having expressed his appreciation to the Magadhan ministers Sunidha and Vassakara with these verses, rose from his seat and departed.

Tena kho pana samayena sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā bhagavantaṁ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhā honti: “yenajja samaṇo gotamo dvārena nikkhamissati, taṁ gotamadvāraṁ nāma bhavissati.

At that time, Sunidha and Vassakara, the Magadhan ministers, followed closely behind the Blessed One, saying, Whichever gate the ascetic Gotama exits today, that will be known as the Gotama Gate.

Yena titthena gaṅgaṁ nadiṁ tarissati, taṁ gotamatitthaṁ nāma bhavissatī”ti.

Whichever ford he uses to cross the Ganges River, that will be known as the Gotama Ford.

Atha kho bhagavā yena dvārena nikkhami, taṁ gotamadvāraṁ nāma ahosi.

Then the Blessed One exited through a gate, and it became known as the Gotama Gate.

Atha kho bhagavā yena gaṅgā nadī tenupasaṅkami.

The Blessed One approached the Ganges River.

Tena kho pana samayena gaṅgā nadī pūrā hoti samatittikā kākapeyyā.

At that time, the Ganges River was full to the brim, even to the point where crows could drink from it.

Appekacce manussā nāvaṁ pariyesanti, appekacce uḷumpaṁ pariyesanti, appekacce kullaṁ bandhanti apārā, pāraṁ gantukāmā.

Some people were searching for a boat, some were looking for a raft, and some were binding together a raft, all wishing to cross to the other side.

Atha kho bhagavā—seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—gaṅgāya nadiyā orimatīre antarahito pārimatīre paccuṭṭhāsi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.

Then the Blessed One, just as a strong man might stretch out his bent arm or bend his outstretched arm, disappeared from the near bank of the Ganges and reappeared on the far bank with the community of disciples.

Addasā kho bhagavā te manusse appekacce nāvaṁ pariyesante appekacce uḷumpaṁ pariyesante appekacce kullaṁ bandhante apārā pāraṁ gantukāme.

The Blessed One saw those people, some searching for a boat, some looking for a raft, and some binding together a raft, all wishing to cross to the other side.

Atha kho bhagavā etamatthaṁ viditvā tāyaṁ velāyaṁ imaṁ udānaṁ udānesi: “Ye taranti aṇṇavaṁ saraṁ, Setuṁ katvāna visajja pallalāni; Kullañhi jano bandhati, Tiṇṇā medhāvino janā”ti.

Then, knowing the significance of this, the Blessed One uttered this inspired utterance at that time: Those who cross the flood, having made a bridge, leaving behind the swamps; People bind a raft, but the wise have crossed over.

Paṭhamabhāṇavāro. 8.

The Discourse on the Noble Truths

Ariyasaccakathā Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena koṭigāmo tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

Then the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ānanda, Come, Ānanda, let us go to the village of Koṭi.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, venerable sir, the Venerable Ānanda replied to the Blessed One.

Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena koṭigāmo tadavasari.

Then the Blessed One, together with a large community of disciples, arrived at the village of Koṭi.

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā koṭigāme viharati.

There, the Blessed One stayed in the village of Koṭi.

Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “Catunnaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasaccānaṁ ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca.

There, the Blessed One addressed the disciples it is through not knowing and not penetrating the Four Noble Truths that both you and I have wandered and transmigrated for a long time.

Katamesaṁ catunnaṁ?

What are these four?

Dukkhassa, bhikkhave, ariyasaccassa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca.

It is through not knowing and not penetrating the Noble Truth of Suffering that both you and I have wandered and transmigrated for a long time.

Dukkhasamudayassa, bhikkhave, ariyasaccassa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca.

It is through not knowing and not penetrating the Noble Truth of the Origin of Suffering that both you and I have wandered and transmigrated for a long time.

Dukkhanirodhassa, bhikkhave, ariyasaccassa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca.

It is through not knowing and not penetrating the Noble Truth of the Cessation of Suffering that both you and I have wandered and transmigrated for a long time.

Dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya, bhikkhave, ariyasaccassa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca.

Due to not fully knowing the Noble Truth of the path leading to the cessation of suffering this long journey of wandering and transmigration has been experienced by both me and you.

Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ anubuddhaṁ paṭividdhaṁ, dukkhasamudayaṁ ariyasaccaṁ anubuddhaṁ paṭividdhaṁ, dukkhanirodhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ anubuddhaṁ paṭividdhaṁ, dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṁ anubuddhaṁ paṭividdhaṁ, ucchinnā bhavataṇhā, khīṇā bhavanetti, natthi dāni punabbhavo”ti.

However, when the Noble Truth of suffering was fully known and penetrated, when the Noble Truth of the origin of suffering was fully known and penetrated, when the Noble Truth of the cessation of suffering was fully known and penetrated, and when the Noble Truth of the path leading to the cessation of suffering was fully known and penetrated, the craving for existence was cut off, the thread of becoming was destroyed, and now there is no more rebirth.

Idamavoca bhagavā.

Thus spoke the Blessed One.

Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā: “Catunnaṁ ariyasaccānaṁ, yathābhūtaṁ adassanā; Saṁsitaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ, tāsu tāsveva jātisu.

Having spoken, the Well-Gone One further said: Due to not seeing the Four Noble Truths as they truly are, there has been a long journey in the cycle of birth and rebirth in various existences.

Tāni etāni diṭṭhāni, bhavanetti samūhatā; Ucchinnaṁ mūlaṁ dukkhassa, natthi dāni punabbhavo”ti.

But now, these truths have been seen, the thread of becoming has been uprooted; the root of suffering has been cut off, and now there is no more rebirth.

Tatrapi sudaṁ bhagavā koṭigāme viharanto etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti: “iti sīlaṁ, iti samādhi, iti paññā.

At that time, the Blessed One, residing in Kotigama, frequently gave a discourse to the disciples on the Dhamma, saying: Thus is virtue, thus is concentration, thus is wisdom.

Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso.

Concentration developed through virtue is of great fruit and benefit.

Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā.

Wisdom developed through concentration is of great fruit and benefit.

Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti. 9. Anāvattidhammasambodhiparāyaṇa Atha kho bhagavā koṭigāme yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena nātikā tenupaṅkamissāmā”ti.

The mind developed through wisdom is completely liberated from the taints, namely, the taint of sense satisfaction, the taint of becoming, and the taint of ignorance.

Then the Blessed One, having stayed as long as he wished in Kotigama, addressed the Venerable Ananda: Come, Ananda, let us go to Nātika.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied the Venerable Ananda to the Blessed One.

Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena nātikā tadavasari.

Then the Blessed One, together with a large community of disciples, arrived at Nātika.

Tatrapi sudaṁ bhagavā nātike viharati giñjakāvasathe.

There, the Blessed One resided in the Brick House at Nātika.

Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Then the Venerable Ananda approached the Blessed One, paid homage to him, and sat down to one side.

Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sāḷho nāma, bhante, bhikkhu nātike kālaṅkato, tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo?

Sitting to one side, the Venerable Ananda said to the Blessed One: Venerable sir, a disciple named Sāḷha has passed away in Nātika. What is his destination, what is his future state?

Nandā nāma, bhante, bhikkhunī nātike kālaṅkatā, tassā kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo?

A nun named Nandā has passed away in Nātika. What is her destination, what is her future state?

Sudatto nāma, bhante, upāsako nātike kālaṅkato, tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo?

A lay follower named Sudatta has passed away in Nātika. What is his destination, what is his future state?

Sujātā nāma, bhante, upāsikā nātike kālaṅkatā, tassā kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo?

A female lay follower named Sujātā has passed away in Nātika. What is her destination, what is her future state?

Kukkuṭo nāma, bhante, upāsako nātike kālaṅkato, tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo?

A lay follower named Kukkuṭa has passed away in Nātika. What is his destination, what is his future state?

Kāḷimbo nāma, bhante, upāsako …pe…

A lay follower named Kāḷimba has passed away in Nātika.

What is his destination, what is his future state?

nikaṭo nāma, bhante, upāsako …

A lay follower named Nikaṭa has passed away in Nātika.

What is his destination, what is his future state?

kaṭissaho nāma, bhante, upāsako …

A lay follower named Kaṭissaha has passed away in Nātika.

What is his destination, what is his future state?

tuṭṭho nāma, bhante, upāsako …

Venerable Sir, the lay follower Tuṭṭho...

santuṭṭho nāma, bhante, upāsako …

the lay follower Santuṭṭho...

bhaddo nāma, bhante, upāsako …

the lay follower Bhaddo...

subhaddo nāma, bhante, upāsako nātike kālaṅkato, tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo”ti?

the lay follower Subhaddo has passed away in Nātika. What is his destination, what is his future state?

“Sāḷho, ānanda, bhikkhu āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsi.

Ānanda, the disciple Sāḷho, with the destruction of the taints, has realized the taintless liberation of mind and liberation by wisdom, having directly known and experienced it in this very life.

Nandā, ānanda, bhikkhunī pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyinī anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā.

Ānanda, the nun Nandā, with the destruction of the five lower fetters, has become one who will reappear spontaneously and there attain final Nibbāna, not liable to return from that world.

Sudatto, ānanda, upāsako tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmī sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissati.

Ānanda, the lay follower Sudatto, with the destruction of three fetters and with the attenuation of greed, hatred, and delusion, is a once-returner, who will return to this world only once more and then make an end of suffering.

Sujātā, ānanda, upāsikā tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpannā avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyaṇā.

Ānanda, the lay follower Sujātā, with the destruction of three fetters, is a stream-enterer, no longer subject to rebirth in lower realms, certain of attaining enlightenment.

Kukkuṭo, ānanda, upāsako pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā.

Ānanda, the lay follower Kukkuṭo, with the destruction of the five lower fetters, has become one who will reappear spontaneously and there attain final Nibbāna, not liable to return from that world.

Kāḷimbo, ānanda, upāsako …pe…

Ānanda, the lay follower Kāḷimbo...

nikaṭo, ānanda, upāsako …

the lay follower Nikaṭo...

kaṭissaho, ānanda, upāsako …

the lay follower Kaṭissaho...

tuṭṭho, ānanda, upāsako …

the lay follower Tuṭṭho...

santuṭṭho, ānanda, upāsako …

the lay follower Santuṭṭho...

bhaddo, ānanda, upāsako …

the lay follower Bhaddo...

subhaddo, ānanda, upāsako pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā.

the lay follower Subhaddo, with the destruction of the five lower fetters, has become one who will reappear spontaneously and there attain final Nibbāna, not liable to return from that world.

Paropaññāsaṁ, ānanda, nātike upāsakā kālaṅkatā, pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyino anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā.

In Nātika, Ānanda, more than fifty lay followers have passed away, with the destruction of the five lower fetters, have become those who will reappear spontaneously and there attain final Nibbāna, not liable to return from that world.

Sādhikā navuti, ānanda, nātike upāsakā kālaṅkatā tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmino sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissanti.

In Nātika, Ānanda, more than ninety lay followers have passed away, with the destruction of three fetters and with the attenuation of greed, hatred, and delusion, are once-returners, who will return to this world only once more and then make an end of suffering.

Sātirekāni, ānanda, pañcasatāni nātike upāsakā kālaṅkatā, tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpannā avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyaṇā. 10.

In Nātika, Ānanda, more than five hundred lay followers have passed away, with the destruction of three fetters, are stream-enterers, no longer subject to rebirth in lower realms, certain of attaining enlightenment.

Dhammādāsadhammapariyāya Anacchariyaṁ kho panetaṁ, ānanda, yaṁ manussabhūto kālaṁ kareyya.

The Mirror of the Dhamma It is not surprising, Ānanda, that a human being should pass away.

Tasmiṁyeva kālaṅkate tathāgataṁ upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṁ pucchissatha, vihesā hesā, ānanda, tathāgatassa.

When one has passed away, you might approach the Tathāgata and ask about this matter, but that would be a burden to the Tathāgata.

Tasmātihānanda, dhammādāsaṁ nāma dhammapariyāyaṁ desessāmi, yena samannāgato ariyasāvako ākaṅkhamāno attanāva attānaṁ byākareyya: ‘khīṇanirayomhi khīṇatiracchānayoni khīṇapettivisayo khīṇāpāyaduggativinipāto, sotāpannohamasmi avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo’ti.

Therefore, Ānanda, I will teach you the Mirror of the Dhamma, by which a noble disciple, if he so wishes, can declare of himself: I am one who has destroyed hell, destroyed the animal realm, destroyed the realm of ghosts, destroyed the states of woe, the bad destinations, the lower realms.

Katamo ca so, ānanda, dhammādāso dhammapariyāyo, yena samannāgato ariyasāvako ākaṅkhamāno attanāva attānaṁ byākareyya: ‘khīṇanirayomhi khīṇatiracchānayoni khīṇapettivisayo khīṇāpāyaduggativinipāto, sotāpannohamasmi avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo’ti? Idhānanda, ariyasāvako buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti.

I am a stream-enterer, no longer subject to rebirth in lower realms, certain of attaining enlightenment.

And what, Ānanda, is the mirror of the Dhamma, the method of the Dhamma, by which an accomplished noble disciple, if they wish, could declare of themselves: I am one who has eradicated the hell realms, the animal realm, the realm of ghosts, the realms of misery, the bad destinations, and the lower worlds.

I am a stream-enterer, not subject to downfall, assured, and destined for full awakening?

Here, Ānanda, a noble disciple is endowed with unwavering confidence in the Tathāgata: The Blessed One is indeed the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One, endowed with true knowing and conduct, the Well-Gone, the Knower of the Worlds, the incomparable leader of persons to be tamed, the teacher of gods and humans, the Tathāgata, the Blessed One.

Dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti: ‘svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo sandiṭṭhiko akāliko ehipassiko opaneyyiko paccattaṁ veditabbo viññūhī’ti.

They are endowed with unwavering confidence in the Dhamma: The Dhamma is well-expounded by the Blessed One, visible here and now, timeless, inviting one to come and see, leading onwards, to be personally experienced by the wise.

Saṅghe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti: ‘suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, ujuppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, ñāyappaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, sāmīcippaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho yadidaṁ cattāri purisayugāni aṭṭha purisapuggalā, esa bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho āhuneyyo pāhuneyyo dakkhiṇeyyo añjalikaraṇīyo anuttaraṁ puññakkhettaṁ lokassā’ti.

They are endowed with unwavering confidence in the Sangha: The Sangha of the Blessed One's disciples is practicing the good way, practicing the straight way, practicing the true way, practicing the proper way. That is, the four pairs of persons, the eight types of individuals; this Sangha of the Blessed One's disciples is worthy of gifts, worthy of hospitality, worthy of offerings, worthy of reverential salutation, the unsurpassed field of merit for the world.

Ariyakantehi sīlehi samannāgato hoti akhaṇḍehi acchiddehi asabalehi akammāsehi bhujissehi viññūpasatthehi aparāmaṭṭhehi samādhisaṁvattanikehi.

They are endowed with virtues dear to the noble ones, unbroken, untorn, unblemished, unspotted, liberating, praised by the wise, not misapprehended, leading to concentration.

Ayaṁ kho so, ānanda, dhammādāso dhammapariyāyo, yena samannāgato ariyasāvako ākaṅkhamāno attanāva attānaṁ byākareyya: ‘khīṇanirayomhi khīṇatiracchānayoni khīṇapettivisayo khīṇāpāyaduggativinipāto, sotāpannohamasmi avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo’”ti.

This, Ānanda, is the mirror of the Dhamma, the method of the Dhamma, by which an accomplished noble disciple, if they wish, could declare of themselves: I am one who has eradicated the hell realms, the animal realm, the realm of ghosts, the realms of misery, the bad destinations, and the lower worlds.

I am a stream-enterer, not subject to downfall, assured, and destined for full awakening.

Tatrapi sudaṁ bhagavā nātike viharanto giñjakāvasathe etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti: “Iti sīlaṁ iti samādhi iti paññā.

While residing at Nātika in the Gijjhakūṭa monastery, the Blessed One frequently gave a Dhamma talk to the disciples on this very topic: Such is virtue, such is concentration, such is wisdom.

Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso.

Concentration fortified by virtue is of great fruit and great benefit.

Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā.

Wisdom fortified by concentration is of great fruit and great benefit.

Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti. (…)

The mind fortified by wisdom is completely liberated from the taints, namely, the taint of sense satisfaction, the taint of becoming, and the taint of ignorance.

Atha kho bhagavā nātike yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena vesālī tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

Then, after staying as long as he wished at Nātika, the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ānanda: Come, Ānanda, let us go to Vesālī.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, venerable sir, the Venerable Ānanda replied to the Blessed One.

Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena vesālī tadavasari.

Then the Blessed One, together with a large community of disciples, arrived at Vesālī.

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā vesāliyaṁ viharati ambapālivane.

There, the Blessed One resided in the Ambapālī Grove.

Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “Sato, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vihareyya sampajāno, ayaṁ vo amhākaṁ anusāsanī.

There, the Blessed One addressed the disciples. Disciples, a disciple should dwell mindful and clearly knowing; this is our instruction to you.

Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sato hoti?

And how is a disciple mindful?

Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.

Here a disciple dwells contemplating the body in the body, ardent, clearly knowing, mindful, having removed craving and aversion in regard to the world.

Vedanāsu vedanānupassī …pe…

He dwells contemplating feelings in feelings...

citte cittānupassī …pe…

mind in mind...

dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.

phenomena in phenomena, ardent, clearly knowing, mindful, having removed craving and aversion in regard to the world.

Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sato hoti.

Thus a disciple is mindful.

Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sampajāno hoti?

And how is a disciple clearly knowing?

Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hoti, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī hoti, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī hoti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī hoti, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hoti, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī hoti, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī hoti.

Here a disciple acts with clear knowing when going forward and returning, when looking ahead and looking away, when flexing and extending his limbs, when wearing his robes and carrying his outer robe and bowl, when eating, drinking, consuming food, and tasting, when defecating and urinating, when walking, standing, sitting, falling asleep, waking up, talking, and keeping silent.

Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sampajāno hoti.

Thus a disciple is clearly knowing.

Sato, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vihareyya sampajāno, ayaṁ vo amhākaṁ anusāsanī”ti.

Disciples, a disciple should dwell mindful and clearly knowing; this is our instruction to you.

11. Ambapālīgaṇikā Assosi kho ambapālī gaṇikā: “bhagavā kira vesāliṁ anuppatto vesāliyaṁ viharati mayhaṁ ambavane”ti.

Ambapālī the courtesan heard this. Then Ambapālī the courtesan had fine carriages harnessed, mounted a fine carriage, and departed from Vesālī with fine carriages.

Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā bhaddāni bhaddāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhaddaṁ bhaddaṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhaddehi bhaddehi yānehi vesāliyā niyyāsi. Yena sako ārāmo tena pāyāsi.

She went to her own park.

Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi, yānena gantvā, yānā paccorohitvā pattikāva yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

As far as there was ground for the carriage, she went by carriage; having dismounted, she approached the Blessed One on foot. Having approached, she paid homage to the Blessed One and sat down to one side.

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho ambapāliṁ gaṇikaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.

While she was sitting there, the Blessed One instructed, inspired, and gladdened Ambapālī the courtesan with a talk on the Dhamma.

Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “adhivāsetu me, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

Then Ambapālī the courtesan, having been instructed, inspired, and gladdened by the Blessed One with a talk on the Dhamma, addressed the Blessed One: May the Blessed One, along with the community of disciples, consent to a meal at my place tomorrow.

Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

The Blessed One consented by silence.

Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi. Assosuṁ kho vesālikā licchavī: “bhagavā kira vesāliṁ anuppatto vesāliyaṁ viharati ambapālivane”ti.

Then Ambapālī the courtesan, knowing the Blessed One's consent, rose from her seat, paid homage to the Blessed One, and departed, keeping him on her right.

The Licchavis of Vesālī heard this.

Atha kho te licchavī bhaddāni bhaddāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhaddaṁ bhaddaṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhaddehi bhaddehi yānehi vesāliyā niyyiṁsu.

Then those Licchavis had fine carriages harnessed, mounted fine carriages, and departed from Vesālī with fine carriages.

Tatra ekacce licchavī nīlā honti nīlavaṇṇā nīlavatthā nīlālaṅkārā, ekacce licchavī pītā honti pītavaṇṇā pītavatthā pītālaṅkārā, ekacce licchavī lohitā honti lohitavaṇṇā lohitavatthā lohitālaṅkārā, ekacce licchavī odātā honti odātavaṇṇā odātavatthā odātālaṅkārā.

Some Licchavis were dressed in blue, with blue garments and blue ornaments; some were dressed in yellow, with yellow garments and yellow ornaments; some were dressed in red, with red garments and red ornaments; some were dressed in white, with white garments and white ornaments.

Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā daharānaṁ daharānaṁ licchavīnaṁ akkhena akkhaṁ cakkena cakkaṁ yugena yugaṁ paṭivaṭṭesi.

Then, the courtesan Ambapālī turned back the young Licchavīs, one by one, with her eye, wheel by wheel, yoke by yoke.

Atha kho te licchavī ambapāliṁ gaṇikaṁ etadavocuṁ: “kiṁ, je ambapāli, daharānaṁ daharānaṁ licchavīnaṁ akkhena akkhaṁ cakkena cakkaṁ yugena yugaṁ paṭivaṭṭesī”ti?

Then those Licchavīs said to Ambapālī, the courtesan, Why, dear Ambapālī, do you turn back the young Licchavīs, one by one, with your eye, wheel by wheel, yoke by yoke?

“Tathā hi pana me, ayyaputtā, bhagavā nimantito svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

She replied, Because, young sirs, the Blessed One has been invited by me for a meal tomorrow, along with the community of disciples.

“Dehi, je ambapāli, etaṁ bhattaṁ satasahassenā”ti.

They said, Give us, dear Ambapālī, that meal for a hundred thousand.

“Sacepi me, ayyaputtā, vesāliṁ sāhāraṁ dassatha, evamahaṁ taṁ bhattaṁ na dassāmī”ti.

She replied, Even if you were to give me Vesālī with its revenue, I would not give that meal.

Atha kho te licchavī aṅguliṁ phoṭesuṁ: “jitamha vata bho ambakāya, jitamha vata bho ambakāyā”ti.

Then those Licchavīs snapped their fingers, saying, We are indeed defeated by Ambapālī, we are indeed defeated by Ambapālī.

Atha kho te licchavī yena ambapālivanaṁ tena pāyiṁsu.

Then those Licchavīs went to Ambapālī's grove.

Addasā kho bhagavā te licchavī dūratova āgacchante.

The Blessed One saw those Licchavīs coming from afar.

Disvāna bhikkhū āmantesi: “yesaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ devā tāvatiṁsā adiṭṭhapubbā, oloketha, bhikkhave, licchaviparisaṁ; apaloketha, bhikkhave, licchaviparisaṁ; upasaṁharatha, bhikkhave, licchaviparisaṁ— tāvatiṁsasadisan”ti.

Seeing them, he addressed the disciples those of you who have never seen the gods of the Thirty-Three, look at the Licchavī assembly; observe the Licchavī assembly; approach the Licchavī assembly: they are like the gods of the Thirty-Three.

Atha kho te licchavī yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi, yānena gantvā, yānā paccorohitvā pattikāva yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

Then those Licchavīs, having gone as far as the ground for vehicles, dismounted from their vehicles and approached the Blessed One on foot. Having approached, they paid homage to the Blessed One and sat down to one side.

Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho te licchavī bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.

While they were sitting there, the Blessed One instructed, inspired, roused, and gladdened them with a talk on the Dhamma.

Atha kho te licchavī bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “adhivāsetu no, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

Then those Licchavīs, having been instructed, inspired, roused, and gladdened by the Blessed One's talk on the Dhamma, said to the Blessed One, May the Blessed One consent to a meal with us tomorrow, along with the community of disciples.

Atha kho bhagavā te licchavī etadavoca: “adhivutthaṁ kho me, licchavī, svātanāya ambapāliyā gaṇikāya bhattan”ti.

The Blessed One replied to those Licchavīs, I have already accepted a meal for tomorrow from Ambapālī, the courtesan.

Atha kho te licchavī aṅguliṁ phoṭesuṁ: “jitamha vata bho ambakāya, jitamha vata bho ambakāyā”ti.

Then those Licchavīs snapped their fingers, saying, We are indeed defeated by Ambapālī, we are indeed defeated by Ambapālī.

Atha kho te licchavī bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkamiṁsu.

Then those Licchavīs, having delighted and rejoiced in the Blessed One's words, rose from their seats, paid homage to the Blessed One, circumambulated him, and departed.

Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā tassā rattiyā accayena sake ārāme paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi: “kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

Then, after that night had passed, Ambapālī, the courtesan, had exquisite food and drink prepared in her own grove and informed the Blessed One of the time, saying, It is time, venerable sir, the meal is ready.

Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena ambapāliyā gaṇikāya nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi.

Then the Blessed One, in the morning, having dressed and taken his bowl and robe, went to Ambapālī, the courtesan's residence, along with the community of disciples.

Having arrived, he sat down on the prepared seat.

Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi.

Then, Ambapālī, the courtesan, personally served and satisfied the community of disciples, led by the Tathāgata, with exquisite food and drink.

Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho ambapālī gaṇikā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “imāhaṁ, bhante, ārāmaṁ buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa dammī”ti.

After the meal, Ambapālī took a low seat, sat to one side, and addressed the Blessed One: Venerable Sir, I offer this grove to the community of disciples, led by the Tathāgata.

Paṭiggahesi bhagavā ārāmaṁ.

The Blessed One accepted the grove.

Atha kho bhagavā ambapāliṁ gaṇikaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

Then, the Blessed One, having instructed, inspired, encouraged, and delighted Ambapālī with a discourse on the Dhamma, rose from his seat and departed.

Tatrapi sudaṁ bhagavā vesāliyaṁ viharanto ambapālivane etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti: “iti sīlaṁ, iti samādhi, iti paññā.

While residing in Vesālī, in the Ambapālī Grove, the Blessed One frequently gave a Dhamma talk to the disciples, saying: Such is virtue, such is concentration, such is wisdom.

Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso.

Concentration, developed through virtue, is of great fruit and benefit.

Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā.

Wisdom, developed through concentration, is of great fruit and benefit.

Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti. 12. Veḷuvagāmavassūpagamana Atha kho bhagavā ambapālivane yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena veḷuvagāmako tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

The mind, developed through wisdom, is completely liberated from the taints, namely, the taint of sense satisfaction, the taint of becoming, and the taint of ignorance.

Then, after staying as long as he wished in the Ambapālī Grove, the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ānanda: Come, Ānanda, let us go to the village of Veḷuva.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, Venerable Sir, the Venerable Ānanda replied to the Blessed One.

Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena veḷuvagāmako tadavasari.

Then, the Blessed One, together with a large community of disciples, went to the village of Veḷuva.

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā veḷuvagāmake viharati.

There, the Blessed One stayed.

Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “etha tumhe, bhikkhave, samantā vesāliṁ yathāmittaṁ yathāsandiṭṭhaṁ yathāsambhattaṁ vassaṁ upetha.

There, the Blessed One addressed the disciples: Disciples, go and spend the rains retreat around Vesālī, wherever you have friends, acquaintances, and supporters.

Ahaṁ pana idheva veḷuvagāmake vassaṁ upagacchāmī”ti.

I will spend the rains retreat here in the village of Veḷuva.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paṭissutvā samantā vesāliṁ yathāmittaṁ yathāsandiṭṭhaṁ yathāsambhattaṁ vassaṁ upagacchiṁsu.

Yes, Venerable Sir, the disciples replied to the Blessed One and went to spend the rains retreat around Vesālī, wherever they had friends, acquaintances, and supporters.

Bhagavā pana tattheva veḷuvagāmake vassaṁ upagacchi.

But the Blessed One spent the rains retreat there in the village of Veḷuva.

Atha kho bhagavato vassūpagatassa kharo ābādho uppajji, bāḷhā vedanā vattanti māraṇantikā.

Then, during the rains retreat, a severe illness arose in the Blessed One, with sharp, piercing pains, as if to the point of death.

Tā sudaṁ bhagavā sato sampajāno adhivāsesi avihaññamāno.

The Blessed One endured them, mindful and fully aware, without being distressed.

Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “na kho metaṁ patirūpaṁ, yvāhaṁ anāmantetvā upaṭṭhāke anapaloketvā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ parinibbāyeyyaṁ.

Then it occurred to the Blessed One: It is not fitting for me to attain final Nibbāna without addressing my attendants and without taking leave of the community of disciples.

Yannūnāhaṁ imaṁ ābādhaṁ vīriyena paṭipaṇāmetvā jīvitasaṅkhāraṁ adhiṭṭhāya vihareyyan”ti.

Let me, by energy, suppress this illness and maintain the life force.

Atha kho bhagavā taṁ ābādhaṁ vīriyena paṭipaṇāmetvā jīvitasaṅkhāraṁ adhiṭṭhāya vihāsi.

Then, the Blessed One, by energy, suppressed the illness and maintained the life force.

Atha kho bhagavato so ābādho paṭippassambhi.

Then the Blessed One's illness subsided.

Atha kho bhagavā gilānā vuṭṭhito aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā vihārā nikkhamma vihārapacchāyāyaṁ paññatte āsane nisīdi.

After recovering from his illness, the Blessed One left his dwelling and sat down on a seat prepared in the shade of the monastery.

Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Then the Venerable Ānanda approached the Blessed One, paid homage to him, and sat down to one side.

Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “diṭṭho me, bhante, bhagavato phāsu; diṭṭhaṁ me, bhante, bhagavato khamanīyaṁ, api ca me, bhante, madhurakajāto viya kāyo, disāpi me na pakkhāyanti, dhammāpi maṁ na paṭibhanti bhagavato gelaññena.

While sitting there, the Venerable Ānanda said to the Blessed One, I have seen, Lord, that the Blessed One is comfortable; I have seen, Lord, that the Blessed One is enduring. Yet, Lord, my body feels as if it were intoxicated, the directions do not appear to me, and the teachings do not come to mind because of the Blessed One's illness.

Api ca me, bhante, ahosi kācideva assāsamattā: ‘na tāva bhagavā parinibbāyissati, na yāva bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ ārabbha kiñcideva udāharatī’”ti.

However, Lord, I had some small comfort in thinking, The Blessed One will not attain final Nibbāna until he has made some declaration concerning the community of disciples.

“Kiṁ panānanda, bhikkhusaṅgho mayi paccāsīsati?

But Ānanda, does the community of disciples expect something from me?

Desito, ānanda, mayā dhammo anantaraṁ abāhiraṁ karitvā.

The Dhamma has been taught by me without making any distinction between inner and outer.

Natthānanda, tathāgatassa dhammesu ācariyamuṭṭhi.

There is no secret of the Teacher in the Dhamma, Ānanda.

Yassa nūna, ānanda, evamassa: ‘ahaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pariharissāmī’ti vā ‘mamuddesiko bhikkhusaṅgho’ti vā, so nūna, ānanda, bhikkhusaṅghaṁ ārabbha kiñcideva udāhareyya.

If there is anyone who thinks, I will lead the community of disciples, or The community of disciples is under my guidance, then, Ānanda, that person might make some declaration concerning the community.

Tathāgatassa kho, ānanda, na evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pariharissāmī’ti vā ‘mamuddesiko bhikkhusaṅgho’ti vā.

But it is not so with the Tathāgata, Ānanda. The Tathāgata does not think, I will lead the community of disciples, or The community of disciples is under my guidance.

Sakiṁ, ānanda, tathāgato bhikkhusaṅghaṁ ārabbha kiñcideva udāharissati.

Once, Ānanda, the Tathāgata might make some declaration concerning the community of disciples.

Ahaṁ kho panānanda, etarahi jiṇṇo vuddho mahallako addhagato vayo anuppatto.

But now, Ānanda, I am old, aged, burdened with years, advanced in life, and have reached the end of my lifespan.

Āsītiko me vayo vattati.

I am eighty years old.

Seyyathāpi, ānanda, jajjarasakaṭaṁ veṭhamissakena yāpeti; evameva kho, ānanda, veṭhamissakena maññe tathāgatassa kāyo yāpeti.

Just as an old cart is kept going by being tied together with straps, so too, Ānanda, the Tathāgata's body is kept going by being tied together with straps.

Yasmiṁ, ānanda, samaye tathāgato sabbanimittānaṁ amanasikārā ekaccānaṁ vedanānaṁ nirodhā animittaṁ cetosamādhiṁ upasampajja viharati, phāsutaro, ānanda, tasmiṁ samaye tathāgatassa kāyo hoti. Tasmātihānanda, attadīpā viharatha attasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā, dhammadīpā dhammasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā.

When, Ānanda, the Tathāgata, disregarding all signs, enters and abides in the signless concentration of mind, at that time, Ānanda, the Tathāgata's body is more comfortable.

Therefore, Ānanda, dwell as islands unto yourselves, be your own refuge, with no other refuge; dwell as islands of the Dhamma, be a refuge of the Dhamma, with no other refuge.

Kathañcānanda, bhikkhu attadīpo viharati attasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo, dhammadīpo dhammasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo?

And how, Ānanda, does a disciple dwell as an island unto himself, as his own refuge, with no other refuge; as an island of the Dhamma, as a refuge of the Dhamma, with no other refuge?

Here, Ānanda, a disciple dwells contemplating the body in the body, ardent, clearly knowing, and mindful, having removed craving and aversion in regard to the world.

Idhānanda, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati atāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.

He dwells contemplating feelings in feelings, ardent, clearly knowing, and mindful, having removed craving and aversion in regard to the world.

Vedanāsu …pe… citte …pe… dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.

He dwells contemplating the mind in the mind, ardent, clearly knowing, and mindful, having removed craving and aversion in regard to the world.

Evaṁ kho, ānanda, bhikkhu attadīpo viharati attasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo, dhammadīpo dhammasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo.

He dwells contemplating phenomena in phenomena, ardent, clearly knowing, and mindful, having removed craving and aversion in regard to the world.

Ye hi keci, ānanda, etarahi vā mama vā accayena attadīpā viharissanti attasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā, dhammadīpā dhammasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā, tamatagge me te, ānanda, bhikkhū bhavissanti ye keci sikkhākāmā”ti.

In this way, Ānanda, a disciple dwells as an island unto himself, as his own refuge, with no other refuge; as an island of the Dhamma, as a refuge of the Dhamma, with no other refuge.

Ananda, whoever, now or after my passing, will live as an island unto themselves, as a refuge unto themselves, not seeking any other refuge, with the Dhamma as their island, with the Dhamma as their refuge, not seeking any other refuge, they will be the foremost of my disciples, Ananda, those who are desirous of training.

Dutiyabhāṇavāro. 13.

Discourse on Signs and Luminosity

Nimittobhāsakathā Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya vesāliṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.

Then the Blessed One, having dressed in the morning, took his bowl and robe and entered Vesali for alms.

Vesāliyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “gaṇhāhi, ānanda, nisīdanaṁ, yena cāpālaṁ cetiyaṁ tenupasaṅkamissāma divā vihārāyā”ti.

Having walked for alms in Vesali and returned after the meal, he addressed the Venerable Ananda: Take a seat, Ananda, we will go to the Cāpāla Shrine for the day's abiding.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā nisīdanaṁ ādāya bhagavantaṁ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhi.

Yes, venerable sir, the Venerable Ananda replied to the Blessed One, and taking a seat, he followed closely behind the Blessed One.

Atha kho bhagavā yena cāpālaṁ cetiyaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi.

Then the Blessed One went to the Cāpāla Shrine, and having arrived, he sat down on the prepared seat.

Āyasmāpi kho ānando bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

The Venerable Ananda, having paid homage to the Blessed One, sat down to one side.

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “ramaṇīyā, ānanda, vesālī, ramaṇīyaṁ udenaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ gotamakaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ sattambaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ bahuputtaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ sārandadaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ cāpālaṁ cetiyaṁ.

While sitting to one side, the Blessed One said to the Venerable Ananda: Pleasant, Ananda, is Vesali, pleasant is the Udena Shrine, pleasant is the Gotamaka Shrine, pleasant is the Sattamba Shrine, pleasant is the Bahuputta Shrine, pleasant is the Sārandada Shrine, pleasant is the Cāpāla Shrine.

Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā.

Ananda, for anyone who has developed, cultivated, made much of, established, practiced, and thoroughly undertaken the four bases of spiritual power, if they wish, they could live for a kappa or the remainder of a kappa.

Tathāgatassa kho, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā”ti.

Ananda, the Tathagata has developed, cultivated, made much of, established, practiced, and thoroughly undertaken the four bases of spiritual power, and if he wishes, Ananda, the Tathagata could live for a kappa or the remainder of a kappa.

Evampi kho āyasmā ānando bhagavatā oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne oḷārike obhāse kayiramāne nāsakkhi paṭivijjhituṁ; na bhagavantaṁ yāci: “tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan”ti, yathā taṁ mārena pariyuṭṭhitacitto.

Even so, the Venerable Ananda, while the Blessed One was making a gross sign, while making a gross luminosity, was unable to comprehend it; he did not request the Blessed One, May the Blessed One remain for a kappa, may the Well-Gone One remain for a kappa, for the benefit and happiness of the many, out of compassion for the world, for the welfare, benefit, and happiness of devas and humans, as his mind was overcome by Mara.

Dutiyampi kho bhagavā …pe…

For the second time, the Blessed One...

tatiyampi kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “ramaṇīyā, ānanda, vesālī, ramaṇīyaṁ udenaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ gotamakaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ sattambaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ bahuputtaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ sārandadaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ cāpālaṁ cetiyaṁ.

and for the third time, the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ananda: Pleasant, Ananda, is Vesali, pleasant is the Udena Shrine, pleasant is the Gotamaka Shrine, pleasant is the Sattamba Shrine, pleasant is the Bahuputta Shrine, pleasant is the Sārandada Shrine, pleasant is the Cāpāla Shrine.

Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā.

Ananda, for anyone who has developed, cultivated, made much of, established, practiced, and thoroughly undertaken the four bases of spiritual power, if they wish, they could live for a kappa or the remainder of a kappa.

Tathāgatassa kho, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā”ti.

The Tathāgata, Ānanda, has developed, cultivated, practiced, and thoroughly established the four bases of spiritual power. If he wishes, Ānanda, the Tathāgata could remain for a kalpa or the remainder of a kalpa.

Evampi kho āyasmā ānando bhagavatā oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne oḷārike obhāse kayiramāne nāsakkhi paṭivijjhituṁ; na bhagavantaṁ yāci: “tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan”ti, yathā taṁ mārena pariyuṭṭhitacitto.

Yet, even when the Blessed One was making such a clear sign, such a clear display, venerable Ānanda, with his mind overcome by Māra, did not request the Blessed One, May the Blessed One remain for a kalpa, may the Well-Gone One remain for a kalpa for the benefit and happiness of the many, out of compassion for the world, for the welfare, benefit, and happiness of gods and humans.

Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “gaccha tvaṁ, ānanda, yassadāni kālaṁ maññasī”ti.

Then the Blessed One addressed venerable Ānanda, Go now, Ānanda, and do as you see fit.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā avidūre aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle nisīdi.

Yes, venerable sir, venerable Ānanda replied to the Blessed One, and after rising from his seat, he paid homage to the Blessed One, circumambulated him, and sat down at the foot of a nearby tree.

14. Mārayācanakathā Atha kho māro pāpimā acirapakkante āyasmante ānande yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho māro pāpimā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato.

Then Māra, the Evil One, approached the Blessed One after venerable Ānanda had departed. Standing to one side, Māra, the Evil One, said to the Blessed One, Now, venerable sir, let the Blessed One attain final Nibbāna, let the Well-Gone One attain final Nibbāna. Now is the time for the Blessed One's final Nibbāna.

Bhāsitā kho panesā, bhante, bhagavatā vācā: ‘na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me bhikkhū na sāvakā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacārino, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessantī’ti.

For, venerable sir, the Blessed One has declared, I will not attain final Nibbāna, Evil One, until my disciples are accomplished, trained, skilled, learned, bearers of the Dhamma, practicing in accordance with the Dhamma, practicing properly, acting in accordance with the Dhamma, having learned their own teacher's teaching, they will explain, teach, declare, establish, open, analyze, and make it clear, refuting with reason the arisen opposing views, and teaching the Dhamma with its wonders.

Etarahi kho pana, bhante, bhikkhū bhagavato sāvakā viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacārino, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desenti.

But now, venerable sir, the disciples, disciples of the Blessed One, are accomplished, trained, skilled, learned, bearers of the Dhamma, practicing in accordance with the Dhamma, practicing properly, acting in accordance with the Dhamma, having learned their own teacher's teaching, they explain, teach, declare, establish, open, analyze, and make it clear, refuting with reason the arisen opposing views, and teaching the Dhamma with its wonders.

Parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato.

Now, venerable sir, let the Blessed One attain final Nibbāna, let the Well-Gone One attain final Nibbāna.

Bhāsitā kho panesā, bhante, bhagavatā vācā: ‘na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me bhikkhuniyo na sāvikā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacāriniyo, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessantī’ti.

Now is the time for the Blessed One's final Nibbāna.

For, venerable sir, the Blessed One has declared, I will not attain final Nibbāna, Evil One, until my nuns are accomplished, trained, skilled, learned, bearers of the Dhamma, practicing in accordance with the Dhamma, practicing properly, acting in accordance with the Dhamma, having learned their own teacher's teaching, they will explain, teach, declare, establish, open, analyze, and make it clear, refuting with reason the arisen opposing views, and teaching the Dhamma with its wonders.

Etarahi kho pana, bhante, bhikkhuniyo bhagavato sāvikā viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacāriniyo, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desenti.

At present, venerable sir, the disciplenis, disciples of the Blessed One, are learned, disciplined, confident, well-versed, bearers of the Dhamma, practicing in accordance with the Dhamma, practicing properly, and conduct themselves according to the Dhamma. Having learned from their own teacher, they explain, teach, proclaim, establish, open up, analyze, and make clear the Dhamma.

Parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato.

They refute arising external doctrines with well-reasoned arguments and teach the Dhamma with miraculous power.

Bhāsitā kho panesā, bhante, bhagavatā vācā: ‘na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me upāsakā na sāvakā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacārino, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessantī’ti.

Let the Blessed One now attain final Nibbana, let the Well-Gone One attain final Nibbana, for the time for the Blessed One's final Nibbana has come. This word, venerable sir, was spoken by the Blessed One: I will not attain final Nibbana, O Evil One, until my lay followers are not yet disciples, learned, disciplined, confident, well-versed, bearers of the Dhamma, practicing in accordance with the Dhamma, practicing properly, and conduct themselves according to the Dhamma. Having learned from their own teacher, they will explain, teach, proclaim, establish, open up, analyze, and make clear the Dhamma.

Etarahi kho pana, bhante, upāsakā bhagavato sāvakā viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacārino, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desenti.

They will refute arising external doctrines with well-reasoned arguments and teach the Dhamma with miraculous power.

At present, venerable sir, the lay followers, disciples of the Blessed One, are learned, disciplined, confident, well-versed, bearers of the Dhamma, practicing in accordance with the Dhamma, practicing properly, and conduct themselves according to the Dhamma. Having learned from their own teacher, they explain, teach, proclaim, establish, open up, analyze, and make clear the Dhamma.

Parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato.

They refute arising external doctrines with well-reasoned arguments and teach the Dhamma with miraculous power.

Bhāsitā kho panesā, bhante, bhagavatā vācā: ‘na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me upāsikā na sāvikā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacāriniyo, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessantī’ti.

Let the Blessed One now attain final Nibbana, let the Well-Gone One attain final Nibbana, for the time for the Blessed One's final Nibbana has come.

This word, venerable sir, was spoken by the Blessed One: I will not attain final Nibbana, O Evil One, until my female lay followers are not yet disciples, learned, disciplined, confident, well-versed, bearers of the Dhamma, practicing in accordance with the Dhamma, practicing properly, and conduct themselves according to the Dhamma. Having learned from their own teacher, they will explain, teach, proclaim, establish, open up, analyze, and make clear the Dhamma.

Etarahi kho pana, bhante, upāsikā bhagavato sāvikā viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacāriniyo, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desenti.

They will refute arising external doctrines with well-reasoned arguments and teach the Dhamma with miraculous power. At present, venerable sir, the female lay followers, disciples of the Blessed One, are learned, disciplined, confident, well-versed, bearers of the Dhamma, practicing in accordance with the Dhamma, practicing properly, and conduct themselves according to the Dhamma.

Parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato.

Having learned from their own teacher, they explain, teach, proclaim, establish, open up, analyze, and make clear the Dhamma.

Bhāsitā kho panesā, bhante, bhagavatā vācā: ‘na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me idaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na iddhañceva bhavissati phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitan’ti.

They refute arising external doctrines with well-reasoned arguments and teach the Dhamma with miraculous power.

Let the Blessed One attain final Nibbāna now, venerable sir, let the Well-Gone One attain final Nibbāna. The time for the Blessed One's final Nibbāna has come, venerable sir.

This word has indeed been spoken by the Blessed One: I will not attain final Nibbana, O Evil One, until this holy life of mine has been successful, prosperous, widespread, well-known, and well-proclaimed among gods and humans.

Etarahi kho pana, bhante, bhagavato brahmacariyaṁ iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ, yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitaṁ.

But now, venerable sir, the Blessed One's holy life is indeed successful, prosperous, widespread, well-known, and well-proclaimed among gods and humans.

Parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato”ti.

Let the Blessed One attain final Nibbāna now, venerable sir, let the Well-Gone One attain final Nibbāna.

The time for the Blessed One's final Nibbāna has come, venerable sir.

Evaṁ vutte, bhagavā māraṁ pāpimantaṁ etadavoca: “appossukko tvaṁ, pāpima, hohi, na ciraṁ tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati.

When this was said, the Blessed One addressed Māra, the Evil One: Be at ease, O Evil One, the final Nibbana of the Tathāgata will not be long.

Ito tiṇṇaṁ māsānaṁ accayena tathāgato parinibbāyissatī”ti.

Three months from now, the Tathāgata will attain final Nibbana.

15. Āyusaṅkhāraossajjana Atha kho bhagavā cāpāle cetiye sato sampajāno āyusaṅkhāraṁ ossaji.

Then the Blessed One, at the Cāpāla shrine, mindful and fully aware, relinquished the life force.

Ossaṭṭhe ca bhagavatā āyusaṅkhāre mahābhūmicālo ahosi bhiṁsanako salomahaṁso, devadundubhiyo ca phaliṁsu.

When the Blessed One had relinquished the life force, there was a great earthquake, terrifying and hair-raising, and celestial drums resounded.

Atha kho bhagavā etamatthaṁ viditvā tāyaṁ velāyaṁ imaṁ udānaṁ udānesi: “Tulamatulañca sambhavaṁ, Bhavasaṅkhāramavassaji muni; Ajjhattarato samāhito, Abhindi kavacamivattasambhavan”ti. 16. Mahābhūmicālahetu Atha kho āyasmato ānandassa etadahosi: “acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho, mahā vatāyaṁ bhūmicālo; sumahā vatāyaṁ bhūmicālo bhiṁsanako salomahaṁso; devadundubhiyo ca phaliṁsu.

Then the Blessed One, knowing the significance of this event, at that time uttered this inspired utterance: The sage has relinquished the conditioned existence, both the measurable and the immeasurable; delighting within, concentrated, he has broken the armor of self-creation.

Then it occurred to the Venerable Ānanda: Wonderful, indeed, sir, marvelous, indeed, sir, this great earthquake; this great earthquake is terrifying and hair-raising, and celestial drums resounded.

Ko nu kho hetu ko paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāyā”ti?

What, indeed, is the cause, what is the reason for the appearance of this great earthquake?

Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi, ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante.

Then the Venerable Ānanda approached the Blessed One, and having approached, he paid homage to the Blessed One and sat down to one side.

Sitting to one side, the Venerable Ānanda said to the Blessed One: Wonderful, venerable sir, marvelous, venerable sir.

Mahā vatāyaṁ, bhante, bhūmicālo; sumahā vatāyaṁ, bhante, bhūmicālo bhiṁsanako salomahaṁso; devadundubhiyo ca phaliṁsu.

This great earthquake, venerable sir, is terrifying and hair-raising, and celestial drums resounded.

Ko nu kho, bhante, hetu ko paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāyā”ti?

What, venerable sir, is the cause, what is the reason for the appearance of this great earthquake?

“Aṭṭha kho ime, ānanda, hetū, aṭṭha paccayā mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.

There are, Ānanda, eight causes, eight reasons for the appearance of a great earthquake.

Katame aṭṭha?

What are the eight?

Ayaṁ, ānanda, mahāpathavī udake patiṭṭhitā, udakaṁ vāte patiṭṭhitaṁ, vāto ākāsaṭṭho.

This great earth, Ānanda, is established on water, the water is established on air, and the air is established in space.

Hoti kho so, ānanda, samayo, yaṁ mahāvātā vāyanti.

There comes a time, Ānanda, when great winds blow.

Mahāvātā vāyantā udakaṁ kampenti.

When the great winds blow, they agitate the water.

Udakaṁ kampitaṁ pathaviṁ kampeti.

The agitated water shakes the earth.

Ayaṁ paṭhamo hetu paṭhamo paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.

This is the first cause, the first condition for the appearance of a great earthquake.

Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, samaṇo vā hoti brāhmaṇo vā iddhimā cetovasippatto, devo vā mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo, tassa parittā pathavīsaññā bhāvitā hoti, appamāṇā āposaññā. So imaṁ pathaviṁ kampeti saṅkampeti sampakampeti sampavedheti.

Furthermore, Ānanda, when a recluse or a brahmin, endowed with psychic power and mastery over the mind, or a god of great power and influence, has developed a limited perception of earth and an immeasurable perception of water, he causes this earth to quake, tremble, shake, and vibrate.

Ayaṁ dutiyo hetu dutiyo paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.

This is the second cause, the second condition for the appearance of a great earthquake.

Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, yadā bodhisatto tusitakāyā cavitvā sato sampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkamati, tadāyaṁ pathavī kampati saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati.

Furthermore, Ānanda, when the Bodhisatta, having departed from the Tusita realm, mindfully and with full awareness, descends into his mother's womb, then this earth quakes, trembles, shakes, and vibrates.

Ayaṁ tatiyo hetu tatiyo paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.

This is the third cause, the third condition for the appearance of a great earthquake.

Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, yadā bodhisatto sato sampajāno mātukucchismā nikkhamati, tadāyaṁ pathavī kampati saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati.

Furthermore, Ānanda, when the Bodhisatta, mindfully and with full awareness, emerges from his mother's womb, then this earth quakes, trembles, shakes, and vibrates.

Ayaṁ catuttho hetu catuttho paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.

This is the fourth cause, the fourth condition for the appearance of a great earthquake.

Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, yadā tathāgato anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambujjhati, tadāyaṁ pathavī kampati saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati.

Furthermore, Ānanda, when the Tathāgata attains the unsurpassed perfect enlightenment, then this earth quakes, trembles, shakes, and vibrates.

Ayaṁ pañcamo hetu pañcamo paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.

This is the fifth cause, the fifth condition for the appearance of a great earthquake.

Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, yadā tathāgato anuttaraṁ dhammacakkaṁ pavatteti, tadāyaṁ pathavī kampati saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati.

Furthermore, Ānanda, when the Tathāgata sets in motion the unsurpassed wheel of Dhamma, then this earth quakes, trembles, shakes, and vibrates.

Ayaṁ chaṭṭho hetu chaṭṭho paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.

This is the sixth cause, the sixth condition for the appearance of a great earthquake.

Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, yadā tathāgato sato sampajāno āyusaṅkhāraṁ ossajjati, tadāyaṁ pathavī kampati saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati.

Furthermore, Ānanda, when the Tathāgata, mindfully and with full awareness, relinquishes the life force, then this earth quakes, trembles, shakes, and vibrates.

Ayaṁ sattamo hetu sattamo paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.

This is the seventh cause, the seventh condition for the appearance of a great earthquake.

Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, yadā tathāgato anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati, tadāyaṁ pathavī kampati saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati.

Furthermore, Ānanda, when the Tathāgata attains final Nibbāna in the element of Nibbāna without residue, then this earth quakes, trembles, shakes, and vibrates.

Ayaṁ aṭṭhamo hetu aṭṭhamo paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.

This is the eighth cause, the eighth condition for the appearance of a great earthquake.

Ime kho, ānanda, aṭṭha hetū, aṭṭha paccayā mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya. 17.

These, Ānanda, are the eight causes, the eight conditions for the appearance of a great earthquake.

Aṭṭhaparisā Aṭṭha kho imā, ānanda, parisā.

There are eight assemblies, Ānanda.

Katamā aṭṭha?

What are the eight?

Khattiyaparisā, brāhmaṇaparisā, gahapatiparisā, samaṇaparisā, cātumahārājikaparisā, tāvatiṁsaparisā, māraparisā, brahmaparisā. Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṁ, ānanda, anekasataṁ khattiyaparisaṁ upasaṅkamitā. Tatrapi mayā sannisinnapubbañceva sallapitapubbañca sākacchā ca samāpajjitapubbā.

The assembly of nobles, the assembly of brahmins, the assembly of householders, the assembly of recluses, the assembly of the Four Great Kings, the assembly of the Thirty-three Gods, the assembly of Māra, and the assembly of Brahmā. I, Ānanda, have approached many hundreds of assemblies of nobles. There, I have previously sat, conversed, and engaged in discussions.

Tattha yādisako tesaṁ vaṇṇo hoti, tādisako mayhaṁ vaṇṇo hoti.

In that place, whatever their complexion is, such is my complexion.

Yādisako tesaṁ saro hoti, tādisako mayhaṁ saro hoti.

Whatever their voice is, such is my voice.

Dhammiyā kathāya sandassemi samādapemi samuttejemi sampahaṁsemi.

With a discourse on the Dhamma, I instruct, inspire, rouse, and gladden them.

Bhāsamānañca maṁ na jānanti: ‘ko nu kho ayaṁ bhāsati devo vā manusso vā’ti?

While I am speaking, they do not know, Who indeed is this speaking, a god or a human?

Dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā antaradhāyāmi.

Having instructed, inspired, roused, and gladdened them with a discourse on the Dhamma, I disappear.

Antarahitañca maṁ na jānanti: ‘ko nu kho ayaṁ antarahito devo vā manusso vā’ti?

When I have disappeared, they do not know, Who indeed is this who has disappeared, a god or a human?

Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṁ, ānanda, anekasataṁ brāhmaṇaparisaṁ …pe…

I, Ananda, know the assembly of hundreds of Brahmins, ...

gahapatiparisaṁ …

householders, ...

samaṇaparisaṁ …

ascetics, ...

cātumahārājikaparisaṁ …

the assembly of the Four Great Kings, ...

tāvatiṁsaparisaṁ … māraparisaṁ …

the assembly of the Thirty-Three Gods, ...

brahmaparisaṁ upasaṅkamitā.

the assembly of Mara, ...

Tatrapi mayā sannisinnapubbañceva sallapitapubbañca sākacchā ca samāpajjitapubbā.

the assembly of Brahma, whom I have approached. There, I have sat down, conversed, and engaged in discussion.

Tattha yādisako tesaṁ vaṇṇo hoti, tādisako mayhaṁ vaṇṇo hoti.

In that place, whatever their complexion is, such is my complexion.

Yādisako tesaṁ saro hoti, tādisako mayhaṁ saro hoti.

Whatever their voice is, such is my voice.

Dhammiyā kathāya sandassemi samādapemi samuttejemi sampahaṁsemi.

With a discourse on the Dhamma, I instruct, inspire, rouse, and gladden them.

Bhāsamānañca maṁ na jānanti: ‘ko nu kho ayaṁ bhāsati devo vā manusso vā’ti?

While I am speaking, they do not know, Who indeed is this speaking, a god or a human?

Dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā antaradhāyāmi.

Having instructed, inspired, roused, and gladdened them with a discourse on the Dhamma, I disappear.

Antarahitañca maṁ na jānanti: ‘ko nu kho ayaṁ antarahito devo vā manusso vā’ti?

When I have disappeared, they do not know, Who indeed is this who has disappeared, a god or a human?

Imā kho, ānanda, aṭṭha parisā. 18.

These, Ananda, are the eight assemblies.

Aṭṭhaabhibhāyatana Aṭṭha kho imāni, ānanda, abhibhāyatanāni.

The Eight Bases of Mastery: These are the eight bases of mastery, Ananda.

Katamāni aṭṭha?

What are the eight?

Ajjhattaṁ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni.

One perceives forms internally and sees external forms, limited, beautiful, and ugly.

‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

One thinks, Having mastered them, I know and see them.

Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

This is the first base of mastery.

Ajjhattaṁ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni.

One perceives forms internally and sees external forms, boundless, beautiful, and ugly.

‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

One thinks, Having mastered them, I know and see them.

Idaṁ dutiyaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

This is the second base of mastery.

Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni.

One perceives formlessness internally and sees external forms, limited, beautiful, and ugly.

‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

One thinks, Having mastered them, I know and see them.

Idaṁ tatiyaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

This is the third base of mastery.

Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni.

One perceives formlessness internally and sees external forms, boundless, beautiful, and ugly.

‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

One thinks, Having mastered them, I know and see them.

Idaṁ catutthaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

This is the fourth base of mastery.

Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni.

One perceives formlessness internally and sees external forms, blue, blue-colored, blue-appearing, blue-radiant.

Seyyathāpi nāma umāpupphaṁ nīlaṁ nīlavaṇṇaṁ nīlanidassanaṁ nīlanibhāsaṁ.

Just like a blue lotus, blue in color, blue-appearing, blue-radiant.

Seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ nīlaṁ nīlavaṇṇaṁ nīlanidassanaṁ nīlanibhāsaṁ.

Or like a Benares cloth, smooth on both sides, blue in color, blue-appearing, blue-radiant.

Evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni.

In the same way, one who internally perceives the formless sees external forms that are blue, blue-colored, blue-appearing, and blue-radiant.

‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

With the perception, I have overcome them, I know, I see, he becomes thus aware.

Idaṁ pañcamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

This is the fifth base of mastery.

Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni.

Internally perceiving the formless, one sees external forms that are yellow, yellow-colored, yellow-appearing, and yellow-radiant.

Seyyathāpi nāma kaṇikārapupphaṁ pītaṁ pītavaṇṇaṁ pītanidassanaṁ pītanibhāsaṁ. Seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ pītaṁ pītavaṇṇaṁ pītanidassanaṁ pītanibhāsaṁ. Evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni.

Just as a kanikāra flower is yellow, yellow-colored, yellow-appearing, and yellow-radiant, or a Benares cloth, well-dyed on both sides, is yellow, yellow-colored, yellow-appearing, and yellow-radiant, in the same way, one who internally perceives the formless sees external forms that are yellow, yellow-colored, yellow-appearing, and yellow-radiant.

‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

With the perception, I have overcome them, I know, I see, he becomes thus aware.

Idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

This is the sixth base of mastery.

Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni.

Internally perceiving the formless, one sees external forms that are red, red-colored, red-appearing, and red-radiant.

Seyyathāpi nāma bandhujīvakapupphaṁ lohitakaṁ lohitakavaṇṇaṁ lohitakanidassanaṁ lohitakanibhāsaṁ. Seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ lohitakaṁ lohitakavaṇṇaṁ lohitakanidassanaṁ lohitakanibhāsaṁ. Evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni.

Just as a bandhujīvaka flower is red, red-colored, red-appearing, and red-radiant, or a Benares cloth, well-dyed on both sides, is red, red-colored, red-appearing, and red-radiant, in the same way, one who internally perceives the formless sees external forms that are red, red-colored, red-appearing, and red-radiant.

‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

With the perception, I have overcome them, I know, I see, he becomes thus aware.

Idaṁ sattamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

This is the seventh base of mastery.

Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni.

Internally perceiving the formless, one sees external forms that are white, white-colored, white-appearing, and white-radiant.

Seyyathāpi nāma osadhitārakā odātā odātavaṇṇā odātanidassanā odātanibhāsā. Seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ odātaṁ odātavaṇṇaṁ odātanidassanaṁ odātanibhāsaṁ. Evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni.

Just as the moon is white, white-colored, white-appearing, and white-radiant, or a Benares cloth, well-dyed on both sides, is white, white-colored, white-appearing, and white-radiant, in the same way, one who internally perceives the formless sees external forms that are white, white-colored, white-appearing, and white-radiant.

‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

With the perception, I have overcome them, I know, I see, he becomes thus aware.

Idaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

This is the eighth base of mastery.

Imāni kho, ānanda, aṭṭha abhibhāyatanāni.

These, Ānanda, are the eight bases of mastery.

19. Aṭṭhavimokkha Aṭṭha kho ime, ānanda, vimokkhā.

The Eight Liberations: There are these eight liberations, Ānanda.

Katame aṭṭha?

What are the eight?

Rūpī rūpāni passati, ayaṁ paṭhamo vimokkho.

One with form sees forms; this is the first liberation.

Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati, ayaṁ dutiyo vimokkho.

Internally perceiving the formless, one sees external forms; this is the second liberation.

Subhanteva adhimutto hoti, ayaṁ tatiyo vimokkho.

One is intent only on the beautiful; this is the third liberation.

Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ catuttho vimokkho.

By completely transcending perceptions of form, the disappearance of perceptions of resistance, and not attending to perceptions of diversity, one enters and dwells in the realm of infinite space, thinking, Infinite space.

Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ pañcamo vimokkho.

This is the fourth liberation. Completely transcending the realm of infinite space, he attains and dwells in the realm of infinite consciousness, this is the fifth liberation.

Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ chaṭṭho vimokkho.

Completely transcending the realm of infinite consciousness, he attains and dwells in the realm of nothingness, this is the sixth liberation.

Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ sattamo vimokkho.

Completely transcending the realm of nothingness, he attains and dwells in the realm of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, this is the seventh liberation.

Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ aṭṭhamo vimokkho.

Completely transcending the realm of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, he attains and dwells in the cessation of perception and feeling, this is the eighth liberation.

Ime kho, ānanda, aṭṭha vimokkhā.

These, Ānanda, are the eight liberations.

(…) Ekamidāhaṁ, ānanda, samayaṁ uruvelāyaṁ viharāmi najjā nerañjarāya tīre ajapālanigrodhe paṭhamābhisambuddho.

Once, Ānanda, I was dwelling at Uruvelā on the bank of the river Nerañjarā at the foot of the Ajapāla banyan tree, just after I had attained full enlightenment.

Atha kho, ānanda, māro pāpimā yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

Then, Māra the Evil One approached me; having approached, he stood to one side.

Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho, ānanda, māro pāpimā maṁ etadavoca: ‘parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā; parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato’ti.

Standing there, Māra the Evil One said to me, May the Blessed One now attain final Nibbāna; may the Fortunate One now attain final Nibbāna, for the time of the Blessed Ones final Nibbāna has come.

Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, ānanda, māraṁ pāpimantaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘Na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me bhikkhū na sāvakā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacārino, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessanti.

When this was said, I, Ānanda, replied to Māra the Evil One,

I will not attain final Nibbāna, Evil One, until my disciples are my disciples, accomplished, trained, skilled, learned, bearers of the Dhamma, practicing in accordance with the Dhamma, practicing properly, acting in accordance with the Dhamma, having learned their own teachers teaching, they will explain, teach, declare, establish, open, analyze, and make it clear; they will refute with reason the arisen views of others, and teach the Dhamma with its wonders.

Na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me bhikkhuniyo na sāvikā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacāriniyo, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessanti.

I will not attain final Nibbāna, Evil One, until my nuns are my disciples, accomplished, trained, skilled, learned, bearers of the Dhamma, practicing in accordance with the Dhamma, practicing properly, acting in accordance with the Dhamma, having learned their own teachers teaching, they will explain, teach, declare, establish, open, analyze, and make it clear; they will refute with reason the arisen views of others, and teach the Dhamma with its wonders.

Na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me upāsakā na sāvakā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacārino, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessanti.

I will not attain final Nibbāna, Evil One, until my laymen are my disciples, accomplished, trained, skilled, learned, bearers of the Dhamma, practicing in accordance with the Dhamma, practicing properly, acting in accordance with the Dhamma, having learned their own teachers teaching, they will explain, teach, declare, establish, open, analyze, and make it clear; they will refute with reason the arisen views of others, and teach the Dhamma with its wonders.

Na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me upāsikā na sāvikā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacāriniyo, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessanti.

I shall not attain final Nibbāna, O Evil One, until my female lay followers have become true disciples, learned, disciplined, confident, well-versed in the teachings, bearers of the Dhamma, practicing in accordance with the Dhamma, practicing properly, and living in accordance with the Dhamma. They will learn from their own teacher and will teach, declare, establish, open, analyze, and make clear the Dhamma, refuting with sound reasoning any arisen false doctrines, and will teach the Dhamma with its wonders.

Na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me idaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na iddhañceva bhavissati phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitan’ti.

I shall not attain final Nibbāna, O Evil One, until this holy life has become successful, prosperous, widespread, well-known, and thoroughly proclaimed among gods and humans.

Idāneva kho, ānanda, ajja cāpāle cetiye māro pāpimā yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho, ānanda, māro pāpimā maṁ etadavoca: ‘parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato.

Now, Ānanda, today at the Cāpāla Shrine, Māra the Evil One approached me and, standing to one side, said: Let the Blessed One now attain final Nibbāna, let the Fortunate One attain final Nibbāna.

Now is the time for the Blessed One's final Nibbāna.

Bhāsitā kho panesā, bhante, bhagavatā vācā: “na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me bhikkhū na sāvakā bhavissanti …pe…

But, Ānanda, this was spoken by the Blessed One: I shall not attain final Nibbāna, O Evil One, until my disciples have become true disciples...

yāva me bhikkhuniyo na sāvikā bhavissanti …pe…

until my nuns have become true disciples...

yāva me upāsakā na sāvakā bhavissanti …pe…

until my male lay followers have become true disciples...

yāva me upāsikā na sāvikā bhavissanti …pe…

until my female lay followers have become true disciples...

yāva me idaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na iddhañceva bhavissati phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ, yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitan”ti.

until this holy life has become successful, prosperous, widespread, well-known, and thoroughly proclaimed among gods and humans.

Etarahi kho pana, bhante, bhagavato brahmacariyaṁ iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ, yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitaṁ.

But now, Ānanda, the Blessed One's holy life is successful, prosperous, widespread, well-known, and thoroughly proclaimed among gods and humans.

Parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato’ti.

Let the Blessed One now attain final Nibbāna, let the Fortunate One attain final Nibbāna. Now is the time for the Blessed One's final Nibbāna.

Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, ānanda, māraṁ pāpimantaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘appossukko tvaṁ, pāpima, hohi, na ciraṁ tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati.

When this was said, I, Ānanda, spoke to Māra the Evil One: Be at ease, O Evil One, the Tathāgata's final Nibbāna will not be long delayed.

Ito tiṇṇaṁ māsānaṁ accayena tathāgato parinibbāyissatī’ti.

Three months from now, the Tathāgata will attain final Nibbāna.

Idāneva kho, ānanda, ajja cāpāle cetiye tathāgatena satena sampajānena āyusaṅkhāro ossaṭṭho”ti.

Now, Ānanda, today at the Cāpāla Shrine, the Tathāgata has mindfully and with full awareness relinquished the life force.

20. Ānandayācanakathā Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan”ti.

The Request of Ānanda

When this was said, the Venerable Ānanda spoke to the Blessed One: Let the Blessed One remain for a kappa, let the Fortunate One remain for a kappa, for the benefit and happiness of the many, out of compassion for the world, for the welfare, benefit, and happiness of gods and humans.

“Alaṁ dāni, ānanda.

Enough now, Ānanda.

Mā tathāgataṁ yāci, akālo dāni, ānanda, tathāgataṁ yācanāyā”ti.

Do not ask the Tathāgata, it is not the time now, Ānanda, to make such a request of the Tathāgata.

Dutiyampi kho āyasmā ānando …pe…

For the second time, Venerable Ānanda ...

tatiyampi kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan”ti.

and for the third time, Venerable Ānanda spoke to the Blessed One, Let the Blessed One remain for a kappa, let the Well-Gone One remain for a kappa, for the welfare and happiness of the many, out of compassion for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of devas and humans.

“Saddahasi tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatassa bodhin”ti?

Do you have faith, Ānanda, in the enlightenment of the Tathāgata?

“Evaṁ, bhante”.

Yes, venerable sir.

“Atha kiñcarahi tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgataṁ yāvatatiyakaṁ abhinippīḷesī”ti?

Then why, Ānanda, did you press the Tathāgata a third time?

“Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā.

Venerable sir, I heard it directly from the Blessed One, I received it directly: Ānanda, for anyone who has developed, cultivated, practiced, and thoroughly pursued the four bases of spiritual power, if he wishes, he could remain for a kappa or the remainder of a kappa.

Tathāgatassa kho, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā.

The Tathāgata, Ānanda, has developed, cultivated, practiced, and thoroughly pursued the four bases of spiritual power.

So ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā’”ti.

If he wishes, the Tathāgata could remain for a kappa or the remainder of a kappa.

“Saddahasi tvaṁ, ānandā”ti?

Do you have faith, Ānanda?

“Evaṁ, bhante”.

Yes, venerable sir.

“Tasmātihānanda, tuyhevetaṁ dukkaṭaṁ, tuyhevetaṁ aparaddhaṁ, yaṁ tvaṁ tathāgatena evaṁ oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne oḷārike obhāse kayiramāne nāsakkhi paṭivijjhituṁ, na tathāgataṁ yāci: ‘tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti.

Therefore, Ānanda, it is your fault, it is your mistake, that when the Tathāgata was making such a clear sign, when he was making such a clear display, you were unable to comprehend it, and you did not ask the Tathāgata, Let the Blessed One remain for a kappa, let the Well-Gone One remain for a kappa, for the welfare and happiness of the many, out of compassion for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of devas and humans.

Sace tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgataṁ yāceyyāsi, dveva te vācā tathāgato paṭikkhipeyya, atha tatiyakaṁ adhivāseyya.

If you had asked the Tathāgata, he would have refused you only twice, and on the third time, he would have consented.

Tasmātihānanda, tuyhevetaṁ dukkaṭaṁ, tuyhevetaṁ aparaddhaṁ.

Therefore, Ānanda, it is your fault, it is your mistake.

Ekamidāhaṁ, ānanda, samayaṁ rājagahe viharāmi gijjhakūṭe pabbate.

Once, Ānanda, I was dwelling at Rājagaha on the Vulture's Peak Mountain.

Tatrāpi kho tāhaṁ, ānanda, āmantesiṁ: ‘ramaṇīyaṁ, ānanda, rājagahaṁ, ramaṇīyo, ānanda, gijjhakūṭo pabbato.

There too, Ānanda, I addressed you, Rājagaha is delightful, Ānanda, the Vulture's Peak Mountain is delightful.

Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā.

Ānanda, for anyone who has developed, cultivated, practiced, and thoroughly pursued the four bases of spiritual power, if he wishes, he could remain for a kappa or the remainder of a kappa.

Tathāgatassa kho, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā’ti.

The Tathāgata, Ānanda, has developed, cultivated, practiced, and thoroughly pursued the four bases of spiritual power. If he wishes, the Tathāgata could remain for a kappa or the remainder of a kappa.

Evampi kho tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatena oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne oḷārike obhāse kayiramāne nāsakkhi paṭivijjhituṁ, na tathāgataṁ yāci: ‘tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti.

Even then, Ānanda, when the Tathāgata was making such a clear sign, when he was making such a clear display, you were unable to comprehend it, and you did not ask the Tathāgata, Let the Blessed One remain for a kappa, let the Well-Gone One remain for a kappa, for the welfare and happiness of the many, out of compassion for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of devas and humans.

Sace tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgataṁ yāceyyāsi, dveva te vācā tathāgato paṭikkhipeyya, atha tatiyakaṁ adhivāseyya.

If you, Ānanda, were to request the Tathāgata, the Tathāgata would refuse you twice, but on the third request, he would consent.

Tasmātihānanda, tuyhevetaṁ dukkaṭaṁ, tuyhevetaṁ aparaddhaṁ.

Therefore, Ānanda, this is your fault, this is your mistake.

Ekamidāhaṁ, ānanda, samayaṁ tattheva rājagahe viharāmi gotamanigrodhe …pe…

Once, Ānanda, I was dwelling in Rājagaha at the Gotama Banyan Tree...

tattheva rājagahe viharāmi corapapāte …

and there in Rājagaha at the Thieves Cliff...

tattheva rājagahe viharāmi vebhārapasse sattapaṇṇiguhāyaṁ …

and there in Rājagaha at the Sattapaṇṇi Cave on the Vebhāra slope...

tattheva rājagahe viharāmi isigilipasse kāḷasilāyaṁ …

and there in Rājagaha at the Black Rock on the Isigili slope...

tattheva rājagahe viharāmi sītavane sappasoṇḍikapabbhāre …

and there in Rājagaha at the Cool Grove on the Sappasoṇḍika slope...

tattheva rājagahe viharāmi tapodārāme …

and there in Rājagaha at the Tapodārāma...

tattheva rājagahe viharāmi veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe …

and there in Rājagaha at the Bamboo Grove, the Squirrel Sanctuary...

tattheva rājagahe viharāmi jīvakambavane …

and there in Rājagaha at the Jīvaka's Mango Grove...

tattheva rājagahe viharāmi maddakucchismiṁ migadāye.

and there in Rājagaha at the Maddakucchi Deer Park.

Tatrāpi kho tāhaṁ, ānanda, āmantesiṁ: ‘ramaṇīyaṁ, ānanda, rājagahaṁ, ramaṇīyo gijjhakūṭo pabbato, ramaṇīyo gotamanigrodho, ramaṇīyo corapapāto, ramaṇīyā vebhārapasse sattapaṇṇiguhā, ramaṇīyā isigilipasse kāḷasilā, ramaṇīyo sītavane sappasoṇḍikapabbhāro, ramaṇīyo tapodārāmo, ramaṇīyo veḷuvane kalandakanivāpo, ramaṇīyaṁ jīvakambavanaṁ, ramaṇīyo maddakucchismiṁ migadāyo.

There too, Ānanda, I addressed you: Rājagaha is delightful, Ānanda, the Vulture Peak Mountain is delightful, the Gotama Banyan Tree is delightful, the Thieves Cliff is delightful, the Sattapaṇṇi Cave on the Vebhāra slope is delightful, the Black Rock on the Isigili slope is delightful, the Cool Grove on the Sappasoṇḍika slope is delightful, the Tapodārāma is delightful, the Bamboo Grove, the Squirrel Sanctuary is delightful, the Jīvaka's Mango Grove is delightful, the Maddakucchi Deer Park is delightful.

Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā …pe… ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā’ti.

For anyone, Ānanda, who has developed and cultivated the four bases of spiritual power, made them a vehicle, a foundation, established them, practiced them, and thoroughly undertaken them, if he wishes, Ānanda, the Tathāgata could remain for a kalpa or the remainder of a kalpa.

Evampi kho tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatena oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne oḷārike obhāse kayiramāne nāsakkhi paṭivijjhituṁ, na tathāgataṁ yāci: ‘tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti.

Even so, Ānanda, when the Tathāgata was making a gross sign, when he was making a gross light, you were unable to comprehend it, you did not request the Tathāgata, Let the Blessed One remain for a kalpa, let the Fortunate One remain for a kalpa for the benefit and happiness of the many, out of compassion for the world, for the welfare, benefit, and happiness of gods and humans.

Sace tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgataṁ yāceyyāsi, dveva te vācā tathāgato paṭikkhipeyya, atha tatiyakaṁ adhivāseyya.

If you, Ānanda, were to request the Tathāgata, the Tathāgata would refuse you twice, but on the third request, he would consent.

Tasmātihānanda, tuyhevetaṁ dukkaṭaṁ, tuyhevetaṁ aparaddhaṁ.

Therefore, Ānanda, this is your fault, this is your mistake.

Ekamidāhaṁ, ānanda, samayaṁ idheva vesāliyaṁ viharāmi udene cetiye.

Once, Ānanda, I was dwelling here in Vesālī at the Udena Shrine.

Tatrāpi kho tāhaṁ, ānanda, āmantesiṁ: ‘ramaṇīyā, ānanda, vesālī, ramaṇīyaṁ udenaṁ cetiyaṁ.

There too, Ānanda, I addressed you: Vesālī is delightful, Ānanda, the Udena Shrine is delightful.

Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā.

For anyone, Ānanda, who has developed and cultivated the four bases of spiritual power, made them a vehicle, a foundation, established them, practiced them, and thoroughly undertaken them, if he wishes, he could remain for a kalpa or the remainder of a kalpa.

Tathāgatassa kho, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā’ti.

The Tathāgata, Ānanda, has developed and cultivated the four bases of spiritual power, made them a vehicle, a foundation, established them, practiced them, and thoroughly undertaken them, if he wishes, Ānanda, the Tathāgata could remain for a kalpa or the remainder of a kalpa.

Evampi kho tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatena oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne oḷārike obhāse kayiramāne nāsakkhi paṭivijjhituṁ, na tathāgataṁ yāci: ‘tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti.

Thus, Ānanda, when the Tathāgata was making a gross sign, when he was making a gross manifestation, you were unable to comprehend it, and you did not request the Tathāgata, saying, Let the Blessed One remain for a kappa, let the Sugata remain for a kappa for the welfare and happiness of the many, out of compassion for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.

Sace tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgataṁ yāceyyāsi, dveva te vācā tathāgato paṭikkhipeyya, atha tatiyakaṁ adhivāseyya, tasmātihānanda, tuyhevetaṁ dukkaṭaṁ, tuyhevetaṁ aparaddhaṁ.

If you, Ānanda, had requested the Tathāgata, the Tathāgata would have rejected your words twice, but on the third time, he would have consented. Therefore, Ānanda, this is your fault, this is your mistake.

Ekamidāhaṁ, ānanda, samayaṁ idheva vesāliyaṁ viharāmi gotamake cetiye …pe…

Once, Ānanda, I was dwelling here in Vesālī at the Gotamaka shrine...

idheva vesāliyaṁ viharāmi sattambe cetiye …

I was dwelling here in Vesālī at the Sattamba shrine...

idheva vesāliyaṁ viharāmi bahuputte cetiye …

I was dwelling here in Vesālī at the Bahuputta shrine...

idheva vesāliyaṁ viharāmi sārandade cetiye …

I was dwelling here in Vesālī at the Sārandada shrine...

idāneva kho tāhaṁ, ānanda, ajja cāpāle cetiye āmantesiṁ: ‘ramaṇīyā, ānanda, vesālī, ramaṇīyaṁ udenaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ gotamakaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ sattambaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ bahuputtaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ sārandadaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ cāpālaṁ cetiyaṁ.

Just now, Ānanda, today at the Cāpāla shrine, I addressed you, saying, Pleasant, Ānanda, is Vesālī, pleasant is the Udena shrine, pleasant is the Gotamaka shrine, pleasant is the Sattamba shrine, pleasant is the Bahuputta shrine, pleasant is the Sārandada shrine, pleasant is the Cāpāla shrine.

Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā.

For anyone, Ānanda, who has developed, cultivated, practiced, and thoroughly established the four bases of spiritual power, if he wishes, he could remain for a kappa or the remainder of a kappa.

Tathāgatassa kho, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā’ti.

The Tathāgata, Ānanda, has developed, cultivated, practiced, and thoroughly established the four bases of spiritual power, and if he wishes, Ānanda, the Tathāgata could remain for a kappa or the remainder of a kappa.

Evampi kho tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatena oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne oḷārike obhāse kayiramāne nāsakkhi paṭivijjhituṁ, na tathāgataṁ yāci: ‘tiṭṭhatu bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti.

Thus, Ānanda, when the Tathāgata was making a gross sign, when he was making a gross manifestation, you were unable to comprehend it, and you did not request the Tathāgata, saying, Let the Blessed One remain for a kappa, let the Sugata remain for a kappa for the welfare and happiness of the many, out of compassion for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.

Sace tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgataṁ yāceyyāsi, dveva te vācā tathāgato paṭikkhipeyya, atha tatiyakaṁ adhivāseyya.

If you, Ānanda, had requested the Tathāgata, the Tathāgata would have rejected your words twice, but on the third time, he would have consented.

Tasmātihānanda, tuyhevetaṁ dukkaṭaṁ, tuyhevetaṁ aparaddhaṁ.

Therefore, Ānanda, this is your fault, this is your mistake.

Nanu etaṁ, ānanda, mayā paṭikacceva akkhātaṁ: ‘sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo aññathābhāvo.

Did I not, Ānanda, declare to you beforehand, All that is dear and pleasing must undergo change, separation, and alteration?

Taṁ kutettha, ānanda, labbhā, yaṁ taṁ jātaṁ bhūtaṁ saṅkhataṁ palokadhammaṁ, taṁ vata mā palujjīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati’.

How could it be, Ānanda, that what is born, come into being, conditioned, and subject to decay, should not decay? That is not possible.

Yaṁ kho panetaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatena cattaṁ vantaṁ muttaṁ pahīnaṁ paṭinissaṭṭhaṁ ossaṭṭho āyusaṅkhāro, ekaṁsena vācā bhāsitā: ‘na ciraṁ tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati.

Moreover, Ānanda, what has been abandoned, renounced, relinquished, and let go by the Tathāgata, the life force has been completely given up, and a definitive statement has been made.

Ito tiṇṇaṁ māsānaṁ accayena tathāgato parinibbāyissatī’ti.

The Tathagata's final passing will not be long.

Tañca tathāgato jīvitahetu puna paccāvamissatīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.

In three months from now, the Tathagata will attain final Nibbana.

Āyāmānanda, yena mahāvanaṁ kūṭāgārasālā tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

It is not possible for the Tathāgata to turn back from life for any reason.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Come, Ananda, let us go to the Great Forest, to the Hall with the peaked roof.

Atha kho bhagavā āyasmatā ānandena saddhiṁ yena mahāvanaṁ kūṭāgārasālā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “gaccha tvaṁ, ānanda, yāvatikā bhikkhū vesāliṁ upanissāya viharanti, te sabbe upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ sannipātehī”ti.

Yes, venerable sir, replied Venerable Ananda to the Blessed One. Then the Blessed One, together with Venerable Ananda, went to the Great Forest, to the Hall with the peaked roof.

Having arrived, he addressed Venerable Ananda, Go, Ananda, gather all the disciples residing in Vesali in the assembly hall.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā yāvatikā bhikkhū vesāliṁ upanissāya viharanti, te sabbe upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ sannipātetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied Venerable Ananda. After gathering all the disciples residing in Vesali in the assembly hall, he approached the Blessed One, paid homage, and stood to one side.

Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sannipatito, bhante, bhikkhusaṅgho, yassadāni, bhante, bhagavā kālaṁ maññatī”ti. (…)

Standing there, Venerable Ananda said to the Blessed One, The assembly of disciples is gathered, venerable sir. Now is the time for the Blessed One to do as he sees fit.

Atha kho bhagavā yenupaṭṭhānasālā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “tasmātiha, bhikkhave, ye te mayā dhammā abhiññā desitā, te vo sādhukaṁ uggahetvā āsevitabbā bhāvetabbā bahulīkātabbā, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

Then the Blessed One went to the assembly hall, sat down on the prepared seat, and addressed the disciples: Therefore those teachings that I have directly known and taught to you, you should thoroughly learn, cultivate, develop, and frequently practice, so that this holy life may endure for a long time, for the welfare and happiness of many, out of compassion for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of devas and humans.

Katame ca te, bhikkhave, dhammā mayā abhiññā desitā, ye vo sādhukaṁ uggahetvā āsevitabbā bhāvetabbā bahulīkātabbā, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

And what are those teachings that I have directly known and taught to you, which you should thoroughly learn, cultivate, develop, and frequently practice, so that this holy life may endure for a long time, for the welfare and happiness of many, out of compassion for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of devas and humans?

Seyyathidaṁ—cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo.

They are the four dwellings of mindfulness, the four right efforts, the four bases of spiritual power, the five faculties, the five powers, the seven factors of enlightenment, and the Noble Eightfold Path.

Ime kho te, bhikkhave, dhammā mayā abhiññā desitā, ye vo sādhukaṁ uggahetvā āsevitabbā bhāvetabbā bahulīkātabbā, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan”ti.

These are the teachings that I have directly known and taught to you, which you should thoroughly learn, cultivate, develop, and frequently practice, so that this holy life may endure for a long time, for the welfare and happiness of many, out of compassion for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of devas and humans.

Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “handa dāni, bhikkhave, āmantayāmi vo, vayadhammā saṅkhārā, appamādena sampādetha.

Then the Blessed One addressed the disciples: Now I address you...

Formations are subject to decay; accomplish with diligence.

Naciraṁ tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati.

Soon the Tathagata's final passing will occur.

Ito tiṇṇaṁ māsānaṁ accayena tathāgato parinibbāyissatī”ti.

Within three months, the Tathagata will attain final Nibbana.

Idamavoca bhagavā.

Thus spoke the Blessed One.

Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā: “Paripakko vayo mayhaṁ, parittaṁ mama jīvitaṁ; Pahāya vo gamissāmi, kataṁ me saraṇamattano.

Having said this, the Well-Gone One further addressed the assembly: My life has reached its full term, my lifespan is short; leaving you, I will go, having made my refuge in myself.

Appamattā satīmanto, susīlā hotha bhikkhavo; Susamāhitasaṅkappā, sacittamanurakkhatha.

Be diligent, mindful, and virtuous, O disciples; with well-composed thoughts, protect your minds.

Yo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye, appamatto vihassati; Pahāya jātisaṁsāraṁ, dukkhassantaṁ karissatī”ti.

Whoever lives diligently in this Dhamma and discipline, having abandoned the cycle of birth, will make an end of suffering.

Tatiyo bhāṇavāro.

This is the third recitation section.

21. Nāgāpalokita Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya vesāliṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.

The Glance at Vesali

Then the Blessed One, in the morning, having dressed and taken his bowl and robe, entered Vesali for alms.

Vesāliyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nāgāpalokitaṁ vesāliṁ apaloketvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “idaṁ pacchimakaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatassa vesāliyā dassanaṁ bhavissati.

Having walked for alms in Vesali and returned after the meal, he looked back at Vesali from the Nāga's glance and addressed the Venerable Ananda: This will be the last sight of Vesali for the Tathagata.

Āyāmānanda, yena bhaṇḍagāmo tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

Come, Ananda, let us go to the village of Bhandagama.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied the Venerable Ananda to the Blessed One.

Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena bhaṇḍagāmo tadavasari.

Then the Blessed One, together with a large community of disciples, went to the village of Bhandagama.

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā bhaṇḍagāme viharati.

There, the Blessed One stayed in Bhandagama.

Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “catunnaṁ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṁ ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca.

There, the Blessed One addressed the disciples: Due to not knowing and not penetrating four things, this long course of wandering and transmigration has been experienced by both me and you.

Katamesaṁ catunnaṁ?

What are these four?

Ariyassa, bhikkhave, sīlassa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca.

Not knowing and not penetrating noble virtue, this long course of wandering and transmigration has been experienced by both me and you.

Ariyassa, bhikkhave, samādhissa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca.

Not knowing and not penetrating noble concentration, this long course of wandering and transmigration has been experienced by both me and you.

Ariyāya, bhikkhave, paññāya ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca.

Not knowing and not penetrating noble wisdom, this long course of wandering and transmigration has been experienced by both me and you.

Ariyāya, bhikkhave, vimuttiyā ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca.

Not knowing and not penetrating noble liberation, this long course of wandering and transmigration has been experienced by both me and you.

Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyaṁ sīlaṁ anubuddhaṁ paṭividdhaṁ, ariyo samādhi anubuddho paṭividdho, ariyā paññā anubuddhā paṭividdhā, ariyā vimutti anubuddhā paṭividdhā, ucchinnā bhavataṇhā, khīṇā bhavanetti, natthi dāni punabbhavo”ti.

But now noble virtue is known and penetrated, noble concentration is known and penetrated, noble wisdom is known and penetrated, noble liberation is known and penetrated; the craving for existence is cut off, the conduit to becoming is destroyed, there is no more rebirth.

Idamavoca bhagavā.

Thus spoke the Blessed One.

Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā: “Sīlaṁ samādhi paññā ca, vimutti ca anuttarā; Anubuddhā ime dhammā, gotamena yasassinā.

Having said this, the Well-Gone One further addressed the assembly: Virtue, concentration, wisdom, and unsurpassed liberation; these Dhammas are known.

Iti buddho abhiññāya, dhammamakkhāsi bhikkhunaṁ; Dukkhassantakaro satthā, cakkhumā parinibbuto”ti.

The renowned Gotama, the Tathāgata, having realized the truth, taught the Dhamma to the disciples.

The teacher, who brings an end to suffering, the one with vision, has attained final Nibbana.

Tatrāpi sudaṁ bhagavā bhaṇḍagāme viharanto etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti: “iti sīlaṁ, iti samādhi, iti paññā.

While residing in the village of Bhaṇḍa, the Blessed One frequently gave a discourse to the disciples on the Dhamma, saying: This is virtue, this is concentration, this is wisdom.

Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso.

Concentration developed through virtue is of great fruit and benefit.

Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā.

Wisdom developed through concentration is of great fruit and benefit.

Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti. 22.

The mind developed through wisdom is completely liberated from the taints, namely, the taint of sense satisfaction, the taint of becoming, and the taint of ignorance.

Catumahāpadesakathā Atha kho bhagavā bhaṇḍagāme yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena hatthigāmo, yena ambagāmo, yena jambugāmo, yena bhoganagaraṁ tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

Then, the Blessed One, having stayed as long as he wished in the village of Bhaṇḍa, addressed the Venerable Ānanda: Come, Ānanda, let us go to the village of Hatthi, the village of Amba, the village of Jambu, and the city of Bhoga.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied the Venerable Ānanda to the Blessed One.

Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena bhoganagaraṁ tadavasari.

Then the Blessed One, together with a large community of disciples, went to the city of Bhoga.

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā bhoganagare viharati ānande cetiye.

There, the Blessed One resided at the Ānanda Cetiya in Bhoga city.

Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “cattārome, bhikkhave, mahāpadese desessāmi, taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.

There, the Blessed One addressed the disciples: Disciples, I will teach you the four great references. Listen carefully, pay close attention, I will speak.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ.

Yes, venerable sir, the disciples replied to the Blessed One.

Bhagavā etadavoca: “Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘sammukhā metaṁ, āvuso, bhagavato sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ, ayaṁ dhammo ayaṁ vinayo idaṁ satthusāsanan’ti.

The Blessed One said: Here a disciple might say, Friends, I have heard and received this in the presence of the Blessed One: this is the Dhamma, this is the discipline, this is the teaching of the Teacher.

Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno bhāsitaṁ neva abhinanditabbaṁ nappaṭikkositabbaṁ.

The statement of that disciple should neither be approved nor disapproved.

Anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā tāni padabyañjanāni sādhukaṁ uggahetvā sutte osāretabbāni, vinaye sandassetabbāni.

Without approval or disapproval, those words and phrases should be carefully learned and compared with the Suttas and reviewed in the Vinaya.

Tāni ce sutte osāriyamānāni vinaye sandassiyamānāni na ceva sutte osaranti, na ca vinaye sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ na ceva tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; imassa ca bhikkhuno duggahitan’ti.

If they do not conform to the Suttas and do not appear in the Vinaya, you should conclude: Certainly, this is not the word of the Blessed One; it has been wrongly grasped by this disciple.

Iti hetaṁ, bhikkhave, chaḍḍeyyātha.

Thus, you should reject it.

Tāni ce sutte osāriyamānāni vinaye sandassiyamānāni sutte ceva osaranti, vinaye ca sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; imassa ca bhikkhuno suggahitan’ti.

If they conform to the Suttas and appear in the Vinaya, you should conclude: Certainly, this is the word of the Blessed One; it has been rightly grasped by this disciple.

Idaṁ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṁ mahāpadesaṁ dhāreyyātha.

This is the first great reference you should hold.

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘amukasmiṁ nāma āvāse saṅgho viharati sathero sapāmokkho.

Furthermore a disciple might say, In such and such a monastery, there is a community with elders and leaders.

Tassa me saṅghassa sammukhā sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ, ayaṁ dhammo ayaṁ vinayo idaṁ satthusāsanan’ti.

I have heard and received this in the presence of that community: this is the Dhamma, this is the discipline, this is the teaching of the Teacher.

Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno bhāsitaṁ neva abhinanditabbaṁ nappaṭikkositabbaṁ.

Disciples, the speech of a disciple should neither be approved nor rejected.

Anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā tāni padabyañjanāni sādhukaṁ uggahetvā sutte osāretabbāni, vinaye sandassetabbāni.

Without approving or rejecting, those words and phrases should be carefully learned and compared with the Sutta and examined in the Vinaya.

Tāni ce sutte osāriyamānāni vinaye sandassiyamānāni na ceva sutte osaranti, na ca vinaye sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ na ceva tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; tassa ca saṅghassa duggahitan’ti.

If, when compared with the Sutta and examined in the Vinaya, they do not align with the Sutta and do not appear in the Vinaya, it should be concluded: Surely, this is not the word of the Blessed One; it has been wrongly grasped by the community.

Itihetaṁ, bhikkhave, chaḍḍeyyātha.

Thus it should be discarded.

Tāni ce sutte osāriyamānāni vinaye sandassiyamānāni sutte ceva osaranti, vinaye ca sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; tassa ca saṅghassa suggahitan’ti.

But if, when compared with the Sutta and examined in the Vinaya, they align with the Sutta and appear in the Vinaya, it should be concluded: Surely, this is the word of the Blessed One; it has been rightly grasped by the community.

Idaṁ, bhikkhave, dutiyaṁ mahāpadesaṁ dhāreyyātha.

This is the second great standard you should hold.

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘amukasmiṁ nāma āvāse sambahulā therā bhikkhū viharanti bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammadharā vinayadharā mātikādharā.

Here a disciple might say: In such and such a dwelling, many elder disciples reside who are learned, versed in the tradition, bearers of the Dhamma, bearers of the Vinaya, bearers of the summaries.

Tesaṁ me therānaṁ sammukhā sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ— ayaṁ dhammo ayaṁ vinayo idaṁ satthusāsanan’ti.

I have heard and received this in their presence: This is the Dhamma, this is the Vinaya, this is the Teacher's instruction.

Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno bhāsitaṁ neva abhinanditabbaṁ …

The speech of that disciple should neither be approved nor rejected.

pe… na ca vinaye sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ na ceva tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; tesañca therānaṁ duggahitan’ti.

Without approving or rejecting, those words and phrases should be carefully learned and compared with the Sutta and examined in the Vinaya.

If, when compared with the Sutta and examined in the Vinaya, they do not align with the Sutta and do not appear in the Vinaya, it should be concluded: Surely, this is not the word of the Blessed One; it has been wrongly grasped by those elders.

Itihetaṁ, bhikkhave, chaḍḍeyyātha.

Thus it should be discarded.

Tāni ce sutte osāriyamānāni …pe… vinaye ca sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; tesañca therānaṁ suggahitan’ti.

But if, when compared with the Sutta and examined in the Vinaya, they align with the Sutta and appear in the Vinaya, it should be concluded: Surely, this is the word of the Blessed One; it has been rightly grasped by those elders.

Idaṁ, bhikkhave, tatiyaṁ mahāpadesaṁ dhāreyyātha.

This is the third great standard you should hold.

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘amukasmiṁ nāma āvāse eko thero bhikkhu viharati bahussuto āgatāgamo dhammadharo vinayadharo mātikādharo.

Here a disciple might say: In such and such a dwelling, a certain elder disciple resides who is learned, versed in the tradition, a bearer of the Dhamma, a bearer of the Vinaya, a bearer of the summaries.

Tassa me therassa sammukhā sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ— ayaṁ dhammo ayaṁ vinayo idaṁ satthusāsanan’ti.

I have heard and received this in his presence: This is the Dhamma, this is the Vinaya, this is the Teacher's instruction.

Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno bhāsitaṁ neva abhinanditabbaṁ nappaṭikkositabbaṁ.

The speech of that disciple should neither be approved nor rejected.

Anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā tāni padabyañjanāni sādhukaṁ uggahetvā sutte osāretabbāni, vinaye sandassetabbāni.

Without approving or rejecting, those words and phrases should be carefully learned and compared with the Sutta and examined in the Vinaya.

Tāni ce sutte osāriyamānāni vinaye sandassiyamānāni na ceva sutte osaranti, na ca vinaye sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ na ceva tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; tassa ca therassa duggahitan’ti.

If, when compared with the Sutta and examined in the Vinaya, they do not align with the Sutta and do not appear in the Vinaya, it should be concluded: Surely, this is not the word of the Blessed One; it has been wrongly grasped by that elder.

Itihetaṁ, bhikkhave, chaḍḍeyyātha.

Thus it should be discarded.

Tāni ca sutte osāriyamānāni vinaye sandassiyamānāni sutte ceva osaranti, vinaye ca sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; tassa ca therassa suggahitan’ti.

But if, when compared with the Sutta and examined in the Vinaya, they align with the Sutta and appear in the Vinaya, it should be concluded: Surely, this is the word of the Blessed One; it has been rightly grasped by that elder.

Indeed, this is the word of the Blessed One; and it was well known by that elder.

Idaṁ, bhikkhave, catutthaṁ mahāpadesaṁ dhāreyyātha.

This is the fourth great reference you should remember.

Ime kho, bhikkhave, cattāro mahāpadese dhāreyyāthā”ti.

These are the four great references you should remember.

Tatrapi sudaṁ bhagavā bhoganagare viharanto ānande cetiye etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti: “iti sīlaṁ, iti samādhi, iti paññā.

At that time, the Blessed One, residing in Bhoganagara at the Ānanda Shrine, frequently gave a discourse to the disciples, saying: Such is virtue, such is concentration, such is wisdom.

Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso.

Concentration, developed through virtue, is of great fruit and benefit.

Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā.

Wisdom, developed through concentration, is of great fruit and benefit.

Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti. 23.

The mind, developed through wisdom, is completely liberated from the taints, namely, the taint of sense satisfaction, the taint of becoming, and the taint of ignorance.

Kammāraputtacundavatthu Atha kho bhagavā bhoganagare yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena pāvā tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

The Story of Cunda, the Son of a Smith Then the Blessed One, having stayed as long as he wished in Bhoganagara, addressed the Venerable Ānanda: Come, Ānanda, let us go to Pāvā.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, venerable sir, the Venerable Ānanda replied to the Blessed One.

Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena pāvā tadavasari.

Then the Blessed One, together with a large community of disciples, arrived at Pāvā.

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā pāvāyaṁ viharati cundassa kammāraputtassa ambavane.

There, the Blessed One stayed in the mango grove of Cunda, the son of a smith.

Assosi kho cundo kammāraputto: “bhagavā kira pāvaṁ anuppatto, pāvāyaṁ viharati mayhaṁ ambavane”ti.

Cunda, the son of a smith, heard that the Blessed One had arrived.

Atha kho cundo kammāraputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

He approached the Blessed One, paid homage, and sat down to one side.

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho cundaṁ kammāraputtaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.

While Cunda, the son of a smith, was sitting to one side, the Blessed One gave him a discourse on the Dhamma, inspiring, encouraging, and gladdening him.

Atha kho cundo kammāraputto bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassito samādapito samuttejito sampahaṁsito bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “adhivāsetu me, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

Then Cunda, the son of a smith, inspired, encouraged, and gladdened by the Blessed One's discourse on the Dhamma, said to the Blessed One: May the Blessed One consent to accept a meal from me tomorrow, together with the community of disciples.

Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

The Blessed One consented by remaining silent.

Atha kho cundo kammāraputto bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

Knowing that the Blessed One had consented, Cunda, the son of a smith, rose from his seat, paid homage to the Blessed One, and departed, keeping him to his right.

Atha kho cundo kammāraputto tassā rattiyā accayena sake nivesane paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā pahūtañca sūkaramaddavaṁ bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi: “kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

Then, after that night had passed, Cunda, the son of a smith, prepared excellent food and drink in his own residence, including a large quantity of tender pork, and announced the time to the Blessed One: It is time, venerable sir, the meal is ready.

Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena cundassa kammāraputtassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi.

Then the Blessed One, in the morning, dressed and taking his bowl and robe, went with the community of disciples to the residence of Cunda, the son of a smith.

Having arrived, he sat down on the prepared seat.

Nisajja kho bhagavā cundaṁ kammāraputtaṁ āmantesi: “yaṁ te, cunda, sūkaramaddavaṁ paṭiyattaṁ, tena maṁ parivisa.

While seated, the Blessed One addressed Cunda, the son of a smith: Serve me with the tender pork you have prepared, Cunda.

Yaṁ panaññaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyattaṁ, tena bhikkhusaṅghaṁ parivisā”ti.

Serve the community of disciples with the other food and drink you have prepared.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho cundo kammāraputto bhagavato paṭissutvā yaṁ ahosi sūkaramaddavaṁ paṭiyattaṁ, tena bhagavantaṁ parivisi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied Cunda the smith's son to the Blessed One, and he served the Blessed One with the tender boar's meat that had been prepared.

Yaṁ panaññaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyattaṁ, tena bhikkhusaṅghaṁ parivisi.

He served the rest of the food that had been prepared to the community of disciples.

Atha kho bhagavā cundaṁ kammāraputtaṁ āmantesi: “yaṁ te, cunda, sūkaramaddavaṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ, taṁ sobbhe nikhaṇāhi.

Then the Blessed One addressed Cunda the smith's son, Whatever remains of the tender boar's meat, bury it in a pit.

Nāhaṁ taṁ, cunda, passāmi sadevake loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya, yassa taṁ paribhuttaṁ sammā pariṇāmaṁ gaccheyya aññatra tathāgatassā”ti.

I do not see anyone in the world with its devas, maras, and brahmas, in this generation with its recluses and brahmins, with its princes and people, who could digest it properly except the Tathagata.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho cundo kammāraputto bhagavato paṭissutvā yaṁ ahosi sūkaramaddavaṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ, taṁ sobbhe nikhaṇitvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied Cunda the smith's son to the Blessed One, and he buried the remaining tender boar's meat in a pit.

Then he approached the Blessed One, paid homage to him, and sat down to one side.

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho cundaṁ kammāraputtaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi. (…)

While Cunda the smith's son was sitting there, the Blessed One instructed, inspired, and gladdened him with a talk on the Dhamma. Then he rose from his seat and departed.

Atha kho bhagavato cundassa kammāraputtassa bhattaṁ bhuttāvissa kharo ābādho uppajji, lohitapakkhandikā pabāḷhā vedanā vattanti māraṇantikā.

After the Blessed One had eaten Cunda's meal, a severe illness arose in him, with bloody diarrhea and sharp, life-threatening pains.

Tā sudaṁ bhagavā sato sampajāno adhivāsesi avihaññamāno.

The Blessed One endured them, mindful and fully aware, without being distressed.

Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena kusinārā tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

Then the Blessed One addressed the venerable Ananda, Come, Ananda, let us go to Kusinara.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied the venerable Ananda to the Blessed One.

Cundassa bhattaṁ bhuñjitvā, kammārassāti me sutaṁ; Ābādhaṁ samphusī dhīro, pabāḷhaṁ māraṇantikaṁ.

It is said that after eating Cunda's meal, the wise one, the smith's son, was afflicted with a severe, life-threatening illness.

Bhuttassa ca sūkaramaddavena, Byādhippabāḷho udapādi satthuno; Virecamāno bhagavā avoca, “Gacchāmahaṁ kusināraṁ nagaran”ti. 24.

After eating the tender boar's meat, a severe illness arose in the Teacher. While purging, the Blessed One said, I will go to the city of Kusinara.

Pānīyāharaṇa Atha kho bhagavā maggā okkamma yena aññataraṁ rukkhamūlaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “iṅgha me tvaṁ, ānanda, catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ paññapehi, kilantosmi, ānanda, nisīdissāmī”ti.

Then the Blessed One, leaving the road, went to the foot of a certain tree. Having approached, he addressed the venerable Ananda, Please, Ananda, prepare a fourfold robe for me. I am tired, Ananda, and will sit down.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ paññapesi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied the venerable Ananda to the Blessed One, and he prepared a fourfold robe.

Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane.

The Blessed One sat down on the prepared seat.

Nisajja kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “iṅgha me tvaṁ, ānanda, pānīyaṁ āhara, pipāsitosmi, ānanda, pivissāmī”ti.

While sitting, the Blessed One addressed the venerable Ananda, Please, Ananda, bring me some water. I am thirsty, Ananda, and will drink.

Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idāni, bhante, pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni atikkantāni, taṁ cakkacchinnaṁ udakaṁ parittaṁ luḷitaṁ āvilaṁ sandati.

When this was said, the venerable Ananda said to the Blessed One, Just now, venerable sir, five hundred carts have passed by, and the water is churned up, shallow, and muddy.

Ayaṁ, bhante, kakudhā nadī avidūre acchodakā sātodakā sītodakā setodakā suppatitthā ramaṇīyā.

Venerable sir, this river Kakudha is nearby, with clear, pleasant, cool, and pure water, easy to approach and delightful.

Ettha bhagavā pānīyañca pivissati, gattāni ca sītī karissatī”ti.

Here the Blessed One can drink water and cool his limbs.

Dutiyampi kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “iṅgha me tvaṁ, ānanda, pānīyaṁ āhara, pipāsitosmi, ānanda, pivissāmī”ti.

For the second time, the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ānanda, Please, Ānanda, bring me some water. I am thirsty, Ānanda, I will drink.

Dutiyampi kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idāni, bhante, pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni atikkantāni, taṁ cakkacchinnaṁ udakaṁ parittaṁ luḷitaṁ āvilaṁ sandati.

For the second time, Venerable Ānanda said to the Blessed One, Venerable sir, now five hundred carts have passed over it, and the water is shallow, disturbed, and muddy.

Ayaṁ, bhante, kakudhā nadī avidūre acchodakā sātodakā sītodakā setodakā suppatitthā ramaṇīyā.

This river Kakudha is nearby, with clear, pleasant, cool, and pure water, easy to approach and delightful.

Ettha bhagavā pānīyañca pivissati, gattāni ca sītīkarissatī”ti.

Here the Blessed One can drink water and cool his limbs.

Tatiyampi kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “iṅgha me tvaṁ, ānanda, pānīyaṁ āhara, pipāsitosmi, ānanda, pivissāmī”ti.

For the third time, the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ānanda, Please, Ānanda, bring me some water. I am thirsty, Ānanda, I will drink.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā pattaṁ gahetvā yena sā nadikā tenupasaṅkami.

Yes, venerable sir, Venerable Ānanda replied to the Blessed One, took a bowl, and approached the river.

Atha kho sā nadikā cakkacchinnā parittā luḷitā āvilā sandamānā, āyasmante ānande upasaṅkamante acchā vippasannā anāvilā sandittha.

Then, as Venerable Ānanda approached, the river, which had been shallow, disturbed, and muddy, became clear, bright, and undisturbed.

Atha kho āyasmato ānandassa etadahosi: “acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho, tathāgatassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā.

Then it occurred to Venerable Ānanda, Wonderful, indeed, marvelous, indeed, is the great power and majesty of the Tathāgata.

Ayañhi sā nadikā cakkacchinnā parittā luḷitā āvilā sandamānā mayi upasaṅkamante acchā vippasannā anāvilā sandatī”ti.

For this river, which had been shallow, disturbed, and muddy, became clear, bright, and undisturbed as I approached.

Pattena pānīyaṁ ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante, tathāgatassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā.

Taking the water in a bowl, he went to the Blessed One; having approached, he said to the Blessed One, Wonderful, venerable sir, marvelous, venerable sir, is the great power and majesty of the Tathāgata.

Idāni sā bhante nadikā cakkacchinnā parittā luḷitā āvilā sandamānā mayi upasaṅkamante acchā vippasannā anāvilā sandittha.

For this river, which had been shallow, disturbed, and muddy, became clear, bright, and undisturbed as I approached.

Pivatu bhagavā pānīyaṁ pivatu sugato pānīyan”ti.

Let the Blessed One drink the water, let the Sugata drink the water.

Atha kho bhagavā pānīyaṁ apāyi.

Then the Blessed One drank the water.

25. Pukkusamallaputtavatthu Tena kho pana samayena pukkuso mallaputto āḷārassa kālāmassa sāvako kusinārāya pāvaṁ addhānamaggappaṭipanno hoti.

At that time, Pukkusa, the son of the Malla clan, a disciple of Āḷāra Kālāma, was traveling on the road from Kusinārā to Pāvā.

Addasā kho pukkuso mallaputto bhagavantaṁ aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle nisinnaṁ.

Pukkusa saw the Blessed One sitting at the foot of a certain tree.

Disvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Seeing him, he approached the Blessed One; having approached, he paid homage to the Blessed One and sat down to one side.

Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho pukkuso mallaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante, santena vata, bhante, pabbajitā vihārena viharanti.

Sitting to one side, Pukkusa, the son of the Malla clan, said to the Blessed One, Wonderful, venerable sir, marvelous, venerable sir, how peaceful indeed is the dwelling of those who have gone forth.

Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhante, āḷāro kālāmo addhānamaggappaṭipanno maggā okkamma avidūre aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṁ nisīdi.

Once upon a time, venerable sir, Āḷāra Kālāma was traveling along a road. He left the road and sat down for a days rest at the foot of a certain tree not far away.

Atha kho, bhante, pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ nissāya nissāya atikkamiṁsu.

Then, venerable sir, about five hundred carts passed by, one after another, near Āḷāra Kālāma.

Atha kho, bhante, aññataro puriso tassa sakaṭasatthassa piṭṭhito piṭṭhito āgacchanto yena āḷāro kālāmo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ etadavoca: ‘api, bhante, pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni atikkantāni addasā’ti?

Then, venerable sir, a certain man following behind that caravan of carts approached Āḷāra Kālāma and said to him, Venerable sir, did you see about five hundred carts pass by?

‘Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, addasan’ti.

No, friend, I did not see them.

‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, saddaṁ assosī’ti?

But, venerable sir, did you hear any sound?

‘Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, saddaṁ assosin’ti.

No, friend, I did not hear any sound.

‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, sutto ahosī’ti?

Then, venerable sir, were you asleep?

‘Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, sutto ahosin’ti.

No, friend, I was not asleep.

‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, saññī ahosī’ti?

Then, venerable sir, were you conscious?

‘Evamāvuso’ti.

Yes, friend.

‘So tvaṁ, bhante, saññī samāno jāgaro pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni nissāya nissāya atikkantāni neva addasa, na pana saddaṁ assosi; apisu te, bhante, saṅghāṭi rajena okiṇṇā’ti?

So, venerable sir, being conscious and awake, you neither saw the five hundred carts passing by nor heard any sound; yet your robe is covered with dust.

‘Evamāvuso’ti.

Yes, friend.

Atha kho, bhante, tassa purisassa etadahosi: ‘acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho, santena vata bho pabbajitā vihārena viharanti.

Then, venerable sir, that man thought, It is indeed wonderful, it is indeed marvelous, how peaceful is the dwelling of those who have gone forth.

Yatra hi nāma saññī samāno jāgaro pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni nissāya nissāya atikkantāni neva dakkhati, na pana saddaṁ sossatī’ti.

For here is one who, being conscious and awake, neither sees nor hears five hundred carts passing by.

Āḷāre kālāme uḷāraṁ pasādaṁ pavedetvā pakkāmī”ti.

Having expressed great confidence in Āḷāra Kālāma, he departed.

“Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, pukkusa, katamaṁ nu kho dukkarataraṁ vā durabhisambhavataraṁ vā— yo vā saññī samāno jāgaro pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni nissāya nissāya atikkantāni neva passeyya, na pana saddaṁ suṇeyya; yo vā saññī samāno jāgaro deve vassante deve gaḷagaḷāyante vijjullatāsu niccharantīsu asaniyā phalantiyā neva passeyya, na pana saddaṁ suṇeyyā”ti?

What do you think, Pukkusa, which is more difficult or more challenging: for one who is conscious and awake to neither see nor hear five hundred carts passing by, or for one who is conscious and awake to neither see nor hear when it is raining, when the thunder is rumbling, when the lightning is flashing, and when the thunderbolt is striking?

“Kiñhi, bhante, karissanti pañca vā sakaṭasatāni cha vā sakaṭasatāni satta vā sakaṭasatāni aṭṭha vā sakaṭasatāni nava vā sakaṭasatāni, sakaṭasahassaṁ vā sakaṭasatasahassaṁ vā.

What are five hundred carts, venerable sir, or six hundred carts, or seven hundred carts, or eight hundred carts, or nine hundred carts, or a thousand carts, or a hundred thousand carts?

Atha kho etadeva dukkaratarañceva durabhisambhavatarañca yo saññī samāno jāgaro deve vassante deve gaḷagaḷāyante vijjullatāsu niccharantīsu asaniyā phalantiyā neva passeyya, na pana saddaṁ suṇeyyā”ti.

But this is indeed more difficult and more challenging: for one who is conscious and awake to neither see nor hear when it is raining, when the thunder is rumbling, when the lightning is flashing, and when the thunderbolt is striking.

“Ekamidāhaṁ, pukkusa, samayaṁ ātumāyaṁ viharāmi bhusāgāre.

Once, Pukkusa, I was dwelling at Ātumā in a potters shed.

Tena kho pana samayena deve vassante deve gaḷagaḷāyante vijjullatāsu niccharantīsu asaniyā phalantiyā avidūre bhusāgārassa dve kassakā bhātaro hatā cattāro ca balibaddā.

At that time, it was raining, the thunder was rumbling, the lightning was flashing, and the thunderbolt was striking nearby. Two brothers, farmers, and four oxen were killed not far from the potters shed.

Atha kho, pukkusa, ātumāya mahājanakāyo nikkhamitvā yena te dve kassakā bhātaro hatā cattāro ca balibaddā tenupasaṅkami.

Then, Pukkusa, a large crowd of people went out to the place where the two farmer brothers and four oxen had been killed.

Tena kho panāhaṁ, pukkusa, samayena bhusāgārā nikkhamitvā bhusāgāradvāre abbhokāse caṅkamāmi.

At that time, Pukkusa, I had come out of the straw hut and was walking back and forth in the open space at the door of the straw hut.

Atha kho, pukkusa, aññataro puriso tamhā mahājanakāyā yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

Then, Pukkusa, a certain man from that large crowd approached me; having approached, he paid homage to me and stood to one side.

Ekamantaṁ ṭhitaṁ kho ahaṁ, pukkusa, taṁ purisaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘kiṁ nu kho eso, āvuso, mahājanakāyo sannipatito’ti?

While he was standing there, Pukkusa, I said to that man, Why has this large crowd gathered, friend?

‘Idāni, bhante, deve vassante deve gaḷagaḷāyante vijjullatāsu niccharantīsu asaniyā phalantiyā dve kassakā bhātaro hatā cattāro ca balibaddā.

Just now, venerable sir, while it was raining, with the thunder roaring and lightning flashing, and the thunderbolt striking, two farmer brothers and four oxen were killed.

Ettheso mahājanakāyo sannipatito.

That is why this large crowd has gathered.

Tvaṁ pana, bhante, kva ahosī’ti?

But where were you, venerable sir?

‘Idheva kho ahaṁ, āvuso, ahosin’ti.

I was right here, friend.

‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, addasā’ti?

But did you see anything, venerable sir?

‘Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, addasan’ti.

No, friend, I did not see anything.

‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, saddaṁ assosī’ti?

Did you hear anything, venerable sir?

‘Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, saddaṁ assosin’ti.

No, friend, I did not hear anything.

‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, sutto ahosī’ti?

Were you asleep, venerable sir?

‘Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, sutto ahosin’ti.

No, friend, I was not asleep.

‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, saññī ahosī’ti?

Were you conscious, venerable sir?

‘Evamāvuso’ti.

Yes, friend.

‘So tvaṁ, bhante, saññī samāno jāgaro deve vassante deve gaḷagaḷāyante vijjullatāsu niccharantīsu asaniyā phalantiyā neva addasa, na pana saddaṁ assosī’ti?

So, venerable sir, while being conscious and awake, with the rain falling, the thunder roaring, the lightning flashing, and the thunderbolt striking, you neither saw nor heard anything?

‘Evamāvuso’ti.

Yes, friend.

Atha kho, pukkusa, tassa purisassa etadahosi: ‘acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho, santena vata bho pabbajitā vihārena viharanti.

Then, Pukkusa, that man thought, It is truly wonderful, truly marvelous, how peaceful is the dwelling of those who have gone forth.

Yatra hi nāma saññī samāno jāgaro deve vassante deve gaḷagaḷāyante vijjullatāsu niccharantīsu asaniyā phalantiyā neva dakkhati, na pana saddaṁ sossatī’ti.

For one who is conscious and awake, with the rain falling, the thunder roaring, the lightning flashing, and the thunderbolt striking, neither sees nor hears anything.

Mayi uḷāraṁ pasādaṁ pavedetvā maṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmī”ti.

Having expressed great faith in me, he paid homage to me, circumambulated me, and departed.

Evaṁ vutte, pukkuso mallaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “esāhaṁ, bhante, yo me āḷāre kālāme pasādo taṁ mahāvāte vā ophuṇāmi sīghasotāya vā nadiyā pavāhemi.

When this was said, Pukkusa, the son of the Mallas, said to the Blessed One, Venerable sir, I abandon the faith I had in Āḷāra Kālāma, as one might overturn a great vessel or wash away a swift-flowing river.

Abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante.

Excellent, venerable sir, excellent, venerable sir!

Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito.

Just as one might set upright what was overturned, reveal what was hidden, show the way to one who was lost, or hold up a lamp in the dark so that those with eyes could see forms, in the same way, the Blessed One has made the Dhamma clear in many ways.

Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca.

I go to the Blessed One for refuge, to the Dhamma, and to the Saṅgha of disciples.

Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti. Atha kho pukkuso mallaputto aññataraṁ purisaṁ āmantesi: “iṅgha me tvaṁ, bhaṇe, siṅgīvaṇṇaṁ yugamaṭṭhaṁ dhāraṇīyaṁ āharā”ti.

May the Blessed One accept me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge from this day forth for as long as life lasts. Then Pukkusa, the son of the Mallas, addressed a certain man, Come, bring me a pair of gold-colored robes.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho so puriso pukkusassa mallaputtassa paṭissutvā taṁ siṅgīvaṇṇaṁ yugamaṭṭhaṁ dhāraṇīyaṁ āhari.

Yes, venerable sir, the man replied to Pukkusa, the son of the Mallas, and brought the pair of golden robes.

Atha kho pukkuso mallaputto taṁ siṅgīvaṇṇaṁ yugamaṭṭhaṁ dhāraṇīyaṁ bhagavato upanāmesi: “idaṁ, bhante, siṅgīvaṇṇaṁ yugamaṭṭhaṁ dhāraṇīyaṁ, taṁ me bhagavā paṭiggaṇhātu anukampaṁ upādāyā”ti.

Then Pukkusa, the son of the Mallas, offered the pair of golden robes to the Blessed One, saying, Venerable sir, please accept this pair of golden robes out of compassion for me.

“Tena hi, pukkusa, ekena maṁ acchādehi, ekena ānandan”ti.

Then, Pukkusa, cover me with one and Ānanda with the other, the Blessed One said.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho pukkuso mallaputto bhagavato paṭissutvā ekena bhagavantaṁ acchādeti, ekena āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ.

Yes, venerable sir, Pukkusa, the son of the Mallas, replied, and he covered the Blessed One with one and the venerable Ānanda with the other.

Atha kho bhagavā pukkusaṁ mallaputtaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.

Then the Blessed One instructed, inspired, and gladdened Pukkusa, the son of the Mallas, with a Dhamma talk.

Atha kho pukkuso mallaputto bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassito samādapito samuttejito sampahaṁsito uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

Having been instructed, inspired, and gladdened by the Blessed One's Dhamma talk, Pukkusa, the son of the Mallas, rose from his seat, paid homage to the Blessed One, circumambulated him, and departed.

Atha kho āyasmā ānando acirapakkante pukkuse mallaputte taṁ siṅgīvaṇṇaṁ yugamaṭṭhaṁ dhāraṇīyaṁ bhagavato kāyaṁ upanāmesi.

Then, shortly after Pukkusa, the son of the Mallas, had left, the venerable Ānanda presented the pair of golden robes to the Blessed One's body.

Taṁ bhagavato kāyaṁ upanāmitaṁ hataccikaṁ viya khāyati.

The robes appeared as if they had been placed on a golden statue.

Atha kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante, yāva parisuddho, bhante, tathāgatassa chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto.

Then the venerable Ānanda said to the Blessed One, It is wonderful, venerable sir, it is marvelous, venerable sir, how pure and bright the complexion of the Tathāgata is.

Idaṁ, bhante, siṅgīvaṇṇaṁ yugamaṭṭhaṁ dhāraṇīyaṁ bhagavato kāyaṁ upanāmitaṁ hataccikaṁ viya khāyatī”ti.

This pair of golden robes, when placed on the Blessed One's body, appears as if it were on a golden statue.

“Evametaṁ, ānanda, evametaṁ, ānanda, dvīsu kālesu ativiya tathāgatassa kāyo parisuddho hoti chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto.

Indeed, Ānanda, indeed, Ānanda, at two times the Tathāgata's body is supremely pure and bright in complexion.

Katamesu dvīsu?

At what two times?

Yañca, ānanda, rattiṁ tathāgato anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambujjhati, yañca rattiṁ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati.

When, Ānanda, the Tathāgata attains the unsurpassed perfect enlightenment, and when, Ānanda, the Tathāgata attains final Nibbāna in the element of Nibbāna without residue.

Imesu kho, ānanda, dvīsu kālesu ativiya tathāgatassa kāyo parisuddho hoti chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto.

At these two times, Ānanda, the Tathāgata's body is supremely pure and bright in complexion.

Ajja kho panānanda, rattiyā pacchime yāme kusinārāyaṁ upavattane mallānaṁ sālavane antarena yamakasālānaṁ tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati.

Today, Ānanda, in the last watch of the night, in the sal grove of the Mallas between the twin sal trees at Kusinārā, the Tathāgata's final Nibbāna will take place.

Āyāmānanda, yena kakudhā nadī tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

Come, Ānanda, let us go to the Kakutthā River.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, venerable sir, the venerable Ānanda replied to the Blessed One.

Siṅgīvaṇṇaṁ yugamaṭṭhaṁ, pukkuso abhihārayi; Tena acchādito satthā, hemavaṇṇo asobhathāti.

Pukkusa brought the pair of golden robes; the Teacher, covered with them, shone with a golden hue.

(…) Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena kakudhā nadī tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā kakudhaṁ nadiṁ ajjhogāhetvā nhatvā ca pivitvā ca paccuttaritvā yena ambavanaṁ tenupasaṅkami.

Then the Blessed One, together with a large community of disciples, went to the Kakutthā River. Having arrived, he entered the river, bathed, drank, and then came out, proceeding to the mango grove.

Upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ cundakaṁ āmantesi: “iṅgha me tvaṁ, cundaka, catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ paññapehi, kilantosmi, cundaka, nipajjissāmī”ti.

Having approached the Venerable Cunda, he addressed him, Come, Cunda, prepare a fourfold robe for me, for I am weary and will lie down.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā cundako bhagavato paṭissutvā catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ paññapesi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied the Venerable Cunda, and he prepared a fourfold robe for the Blessed One.

Atha kho bhagavā dakkhiṇena passena sīhaseyyaṁ kappesi pāde pādaṁ accādhāya sato sampajāno uṭṭhānasaññaṁ manasikaritvā.

Then the Blessed One lay down on his right side in the lion's posture, placing one foot on the other, mindful and fully aware, with the thought of rising again.

Āyasmā pana cundako tattheva bhagavato purato nisīdi.

The Venerable Cunda sat down in front of the Blessed One.

Gantvāna buddho nadikaṁ kakudhaṁ, Acchodakaṁ sātudakaṁ vippasannaṁ; Ogāhi satthā akilantarūpo, Tathāgato appaṭimo ca loke.

The Tathāgata went to the Kakudha River, clear and pleasant, and entered it, not appearing weary, the Tathagata, unparalleled in the world.

Nhatvā ca pivitvā cudatāri satthā, Purakkhato bhikkhugaṇassa majjhe; Vattā pavattā bhagavā idha dhamme, Upāgami ambavanaṁ mahesi.

Having bathed and drunk, the Teacher crossed over, surrounded by the assembly of disciples.

The Blessed One, the great sage, who was the speaker and proclaimer of the Dhamma here, arrived at the Mango Grove.

Āmantayi cundakaṁ nāma bhikkhuṁ, Catugguṇaṁ santhara me nipajjaṁ; So codito bhāvitattena cundo, Catugguṇaṁ santhari khippameva; Nipajji satthā akilantarūpo, Cundopi tattha pamukhe nisīdīti.

He addressed the disciple named Cunda, Prepare a fourfold spread for me to lie down. Prompted by the one with developed mind, Cunda quickly spread the fourfold robe. The Teacher lay down, not appearing weary, and Cunda sat in front of him.

Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “siyā kho panānanda, cundassa kammāraputtassa koci vippaṭisāraṁ uppādeyya: ‘tassa te, āvuso cunda, alābhā tassa te dulladdhaṁ, yassa te tathāgato pacchimaṁ piṇḍapātaṁ paribhuñjitvā parinibbuto’ti.

Then the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ananda, There might be, Ananda, some remorse arising in Cunda, the son of the smith, It is a loss for you, friend Cunda, it is unfortunate for you, that the Tathagata, having consumed your last meal, has attained final Nibbana.

Cundassa, ānanda, kammāraputtassa evaṁ vippaṭisāro paṭivinetabbo: ‘tassa te, āvuso cunda, lābhā tassa te suladdhaṁ, yassa te tathāgato pacchimaṁ piṇḍapātaṁ paribhuñjitvā parinibbuto.

Ananda, Cunda, the son of the smith, should be consoled thus: It is a gain for you, friend Cunda, it is fortunate for you, that the Tathagata, having consumed your last meal, has attained final Nibbana.

Sammukhā metaṁ, āvuso cunda, bhagavato sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: dveme piṇḍapātā samasamaphalā samavipākā, ativiya aññehi piṇḍapātehi mahapphalatarā ca mahānisaṁsatarā ca.

I have heard this directly from the Blessed One, received it directly: There are these two meals that are of equal fruit, of equal result, and far more fruitful and beneficial than other meals.

Katame dve?

Which two?

Yañca piṇḍapātaṁ paribhuñjitvā tathāgato anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambujjhati, yañca piṇḍapātaṁ paribhuñjitvā tathāgato anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati.

The meal after which the Tathagata attains unsurpassed perfect enlightenment, and the meal after which the Tathagata attains final Nibbana in the element of Nibbana without residue.

Ime dve piṇḍapātā samasamaphalā samavipākā, ativiya aññehi piṇḍapātehi mahapphalatarā ca mahānisaṁsatarā ca.

These two meals are of equal fruit, of equal result, and far more fruitful and beneficial than other meals.

Āyusaṁvattanikaṁ āyasmatā cundena kammāraputtena kammaṁ upacitaṁ, vaṇṇasaṁvattanikaṁ āyasmatā cundena kammāraputtena kammaṁ upacitaṁ, sukhasaṁvattanikaṁ āyasmatā cundena kammāraputtena kammaṁ upacitaṁ, yasasaṁvattanikaṁ āyasmatā cundena kammāraputtena kammaṁ upacitaṁ, saggasaṁvattanikaṁ āyasmatā cundena kammāraputtena kammaṁ upacitaṁ, ādhipateyyasaṁvattanikaṁ āyasmatā cundena kammāraputtena kammaṁ upacitan’ti. Cundassa, ānanda, kammāraputtassa evaṁ vippaṭisāro paṭivinetabbo”ti.

The action accumulated by the Venerable Cunda, the son of the smith, leads to long life, leads to beauty, leads to happiness, leads to fame, leads to heaven, and leads to sovereignty.

Ananda, Cunda, the son of the smith, should be consoled for his remorse. Then the Blessed One, knowing the significance of this moment, uttered this inspired utterance: For one who gives, merit increases; from restraint, enmity does not accumulate; the skillful one abandons corrupt; with the destruction of greed, hatred, and delusion, one is at peace.

Atha kho bhagavā etamatthaṁ viditvā tāyaṁ velāyaṁ imaṁ udānaṁ udānesi: “Dadato puññaṁ pavaḍḍhati, Saṁyamato veraṁ na cīyati; Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakaṁ, Rāgadosamohakkhayā sanibbuto”ti. Catuttho bhāṇavāro. 26.

This is the fourth recitation section.

Yamakasālā Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena hiraññavatiyā nadiyā pārimaṁ tīraṁ, yena kusinārā upavattanaṁ mallānaṁ sālavanaṁ tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.

At the twin sala trees, the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ananda: Come, Ananda, let us go to the further bank of the Hirannavati River, to the grove of the Mallas in the vicinity of Kusinara.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied the Venerable Ananda to the Blessed One.

Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena hiraññavatiyā nadiyā pārimaṁ tīraṁ, yena kusinārā upavattanaṁ mallānaṁ sālavanaṁ tenupasaṅkami.

Then the Blessed One, together with a large community of disciples, went to the further bank of the Hirannavati River, to the grove of the Mallas in the vicinity of Kusinara.

upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “iṅgha me tvaṁ, ānanda, antarena yamakasālānaṁ uttarasīsakaṁ mañcakaṁ paññapehi, kilantosmi, ānanda, nipajjissāmī”ti.

Having arrived, he addressed the Venerable Ananda: Please, Ananda, prepare a couch with its head to the north between the twin sala trees. I am weary, Ananda, and wish to lie down.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā antarena yamakasālānaṁ uttarasīsakaṁ mañcakaṁ paññapesi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied the Venerable Ananda to the Blessed One, and he prepared a couch with its head to the north between the twin sala trees.

Atha kho bhagavā dakkhiṇena passena sīhaseyyaṁ kappesi pāde pādaṁ accādhāya sato sampajāno.

Then the Blessed One lay down on his right side in the lion's posture, placing one foot on the other, mindful and fully aware.

Tena kho pana samayena yamakasālā sabbaphāliphullā honti akālapupphehi.

At that time, the twin sala trees were all in full bloom, though it was not the season for flowering.

Te tathāgatassa sarīraṁ okiranti ajjhokiranti abhippakiranti tathāgatassa pūjāya.

They showered, scattered, and spread over the body of the Tathagata in homage.

Dibbānipi mandāravapupphāni antalikkhā papatanti, tāni tathāgatassa sarīraṁ okiranti ajjhokiranti abhippakiranti tathāgatassa pūjāya.

Celestial Mandarava flowers fell from the sky, showering, scattering, and spreading over the body of the Tathagata in homage.

Dibbānipi candanacuṇṇāni antalikkhā papatanti, tāni tathāgatassa sarīraṁ okiranti ajjhokiranti abhippakiranti tathāgatassa pūjāya.

Celestial sandalwood powder fell from the sky, showering, scattering, and spreading over the body of the Tathagata in homage.

Dibbānipi tūriyāni antalikkhe vajjanti tathāgatassa pūjāya.

Celestial music and songs resounded in the sky in homage to the Tathagata.

Dibbānipi saṅgītāni antalikkhe vattanti tathāgatassa pūjāya. Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “sabbaphāliphullā kho, ānanda, yamakasālā akālapupphehi.

Then the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ananda: Ananda, the twin sala trees are all in full bloom, though it is not the season for flowering.

Te tathāgatassa sarīraṁ okiranti ajjhokiranti abhippakiranti tathāgatassa pūjāya.

They shower, scatter, and spread over the body of the Tathagata in homage.

Dibbānipi mandāravapupphāni antalikkhā papatanti, tāni tathāgatassa sarīraṁ okiranti ajjhokiranti abhippakiranti tathāgatassa pūjāya.

Celestial Mandarava flowers fall from the sky, showering, scattering, and spreading over the body of the Tathagata in homage.

Dibbānipi candanacuṇṇāni antalikkhā papatanti, tāni tathāgatassa sarīraṁ okiranti ajjhokiranti abhippakiranti tathāgatassa pūjāya.

Celestial sandalwood powder falls from the sky, showering, scattering, and spreading over the body of the Tathagata in homage.

Dibbānipi tūriyāni antalikkhe vajjanti tathāgatassa pūjāya.

Celestial music resounds in the sky in homage to the Tathagata.

Dibbānipi saṅgītāni antalikkhe vattanti tathāgatassa pūjāya.

Heavenly songs resound in the sky in honor of the Tathagata.

Na kho, ānanda, ettāvatā tathāgato sakkato vā hoti garukato vā mānito vā pūjito vā apacito vā.

However, Ananda, it is not by such means that the Tathagata is truly honored, respected, revered, worshipped, or venerated.

Yo kho, ānanda, bhikkhu vā bhikkhunī vā upāsako vā upāsikā vā dhammānudhammappaṭipanno viharati sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tathāgataṁ sakkaroti garuṁ karoti māneti pūjeti apaciyati, paramāya pūjāya.

Ananda, it is the disciple, nun, layman, or laywoman who lives in accordance with the Dhamma, practicing rightly and following the path of the Dhamma, who truly honors, respects, reveres, worships, and venerates the Tathagata with the highest form of veneration.

Tasmātihānanda, dhammānudhammappaṭipannā viharissāma sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacārinoti.

Therefore, Ananda, we should live in accordance with the Dhamma, practicing rightly and following the path of the Dhamma.

Evañhi vo, ānanda, sikkhitabban”ti.

Thus should you train yourselves, Ananda.

27. Upavāṇatthera Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā upavāṇo bhagavato purato ṭhito hoti bhagavantaṁ bījayamāno.

At that time, the Venerable Upavāṇa was standing in front of the Blessed One, fanning him.

Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ upavāṇaṁ apasāresi: “apehi, bhikkhu, mā me purato aṭṭhāsī”ti.

Then the Blessed One asked the Venerable Upavāṇa to step aside, saying, Move aside do not stand in front of me.

Atha kho āyasmato ānandassa etadahosi: “ayaṁ kho āyasmā upavāṇo dīgharattaṁ bhagavato upaṭṭhāko santikāvacaro samīpacārī.

Then it occurred to the Venerable Ananda, The Venerable Upavāṇa has long been an attendant of the Blessed One, staying close by and serving him.

Atha ca pana bhagavā pacchime kāle āyasmantaṁ upavāṇaṁ apasāreti: ‘apehi, bhikkhu, mā me purato aṭṭhāsī’ti.

Yet, at this final time, the Blessed One asks the Venerable Upavāṇa to step aside, saying, Move aside do not stand in front of me.

Ko nu kho hetu, ko paccayo, yaṁ bhagavā āyasmantaṁ upavāṇaṁ apasāreti: ‘apehi, bhikkhu, mā me purato aṭṭhāsī’”ti?

What could be the reason, what could be the cause, that the Blessed One asks the Venerable Upavāṇa to step aside?

Atha kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, bhante, āyasmā upavāṇo dīgharattaṁ bhagavato upaṭṭhāko santikāvacaro samīpacārī.

Then the Venerable Ananda asked the Blessed One, Venerable Sir, the Venerable Upavāṇa has long been an attendant of the Blessed One, staying close by and serving him.

Atha ca pana bhagavā pacchime kāle āyasmantaṁ upavāṇaṁ apasāreti: ‘apehi, bhikkhu, mā me purato aṭṭhāsī’ti.

Yet, at this final time, the Blessed One asks the Venerable Upavāṇa to step aside, saying, Move aside do not stand in front of me.

Ko nu kho, bhante, hetu, ko paccayo, yaṁ bhagavā āyasmantaṁ upavāṇaṁ apasāreti: ‘apehi, bhikkhu, mā me purato aṭṭhāsī’”ti?

What could be the reason, what could be the cause, that the Blessed One asks the Venerable Upavāṇa to step aside?

“Yebhuyyena, ānanda, dasasu lokadhātūsu devatā sannipatitā tathāgataṁ dassanāya.

Ananda, in many of the ten world-systems, deities have gathered to see the Tathagata.

Yāvatā, ānanda, kusinārā upavattanaṁ mallānaṁ sālavanaṁ samantato dvādasa yojanāni, natthi so padeso vālaggakoṭinittudanamattopi mahesakkhāhi devatāhi apphuṭo.

As far as the twelve yojanas around Kusinara, in the Mallas Sala Grove, there is no space, not even the tip of a hair, that is not filled with powerful deities.

Devatā, ānanda, ujjhāyanti: ‘dūrā ca vatamha āgatā tathāgataṁ dassanāya.

The deities, Ananda, are complaining, We have come from afar to see the Tathagata.

Kadāci karahaci tathāgatā loke uppajjanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā.

Rarely do Tathagatas, Arahants, and Perfectly Enlightened Ones arise in the world.

Ajjeva rattiyā pacchime yāme tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati.

Tonight, in the last watch of the night, the Tathagata will attain final Nibbana.

Ayañca mahesakkho bhikkhu bhagavato purato ṭhito ovārento, na mayaṁ labhāma pacchime kāle tathāgataṁ dassanāyā’”ti.

Yet this powerful disciple stands in front of the Blessed One, blocking our view, and we cannot see the Tathagata at this final time.

“Kathaṁbhūtā pana, bhante, bhagavā devatā manasikarotī”ti?

How, Venerable Sir, does the Blessed One regard the deities?

“Santānanda, devatā ākāse pathavīsaññiniyo kese pakiriya kandanti, bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti: ‘atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbāyissati, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbāyissati, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antaradhāyissatī’ti.

Ananda, the deities in the sky, perceiving the earth, are weeping, scattering their hair, raising their arms, lamenting, falling down, rolling about, and turning over.

The Blessed One will soon attain final Nibbāna, the Well-Gone One will soon attain final Nibbāna, the Eye of the world will soon disappear.

Santānanda, devatā pathaviyaṁ pathavīsaññiniyo kese pakiriya kandanti, bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti: ‘atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbāyissati, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbāyissati, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antaradhāyissatī’ti.

In response, some deities on earth, with their minds attached to the earth, scatter their hair and weep, raising their arms and lamenting, falling down, rolling about, and turning over, saying, The Blessed One will soon attain final Nibbāna, the Well-Gone One will soon attain final Nibbāna, the Eye of the world will soon disappear.

Yā pana tā devatā vītarāgā, tā satā sampajānā adhivāsenti: ‘aniccā saṅkhārā, taṁ kutettha labbhā’”ti.

However, those deities who are free from passion, with mindfulness and clear knowing, endure, saying, Formations are impermanent; what is there to be gained from this?

28. Catusaṁvejanīyaṭhāna “Pubbe, bhante, disāsu vassaṁvuṭṭhā bhikkhū āgacchanti tathāgataṁ dassanāya.

The Four Places of Reverence

Previously, venerable sir, disciples who had completed the rains retreat in various regions would come to see the Tathāgata.

Te mayaṁ labhāma manobhāvanīye bhikkhū dassanāya, labhāma payirupāsanāya.

We had the opportunity to see disciples who were inspiring to the mind, to attend upon them.

Bhagavato pana mayaṁ, bhante, accayena na labhissāma manobhāvanīye bhikkhū dassanāya, na labhissāma payirupāsanāyā”ti.

But after the passing of the Blessed One, venerable sir, we will not have the opportunity to see disciples who are inspiring to the mind, nor to attend upon them.

“Cattārimāni, ānanda, saddhassa kulaputtassa dassanīyāni saṁvejanīyāni ṭhānāni.

There are, Ānanda, four places that are worthy of seeing and that can inspire a sense of urgency in a faithful son of good family.

Katamāni cattāri?

What are the four?

‘Idha tathāgato jāto’ti, ānanda, saddhassa kulaputtassa dassanīyaṁ saṁvejanīyaṁ ṭhānaṁ.

Here the Tathāgata was born, Ānanda, is a place worthy of seeing and that can inspire a sense of urgency in a faithful son of good family.

‘Idha tathāgato anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambuddho’ti, ānanda, saddhassa kulaputtassa dassanīyaṁ saṁvejanīyaṁ ṭhānaṁ.

Here the Tathāgata attained unsurpassed, perfect enlightenment, Ānanda, is a place worthy of seeing and that can inspire a sense of urgency in a faithful son of good family.

‘Idha tathāgatena anuttaraṁ dhammacakkaṁ pavattitan’ti, ānanda, saddhassa kulaputtassa dassanīyaṁ saṁvejanīyaṁ ṭhānaṁ.

Here the Tathāgata set in motion the unsurpassed Wheel of Dhamma, Ānanda, is a place worthy of seeing and that can inspire a sense of urgency in a faithful son of good family.

‘Idha tathāgato anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbuto’ti, ānanda, saddhassa kulaputtassa dassanīyaṁ saṁvejanīyaṁ ṭhānaṁ.

Here the Tathāgata attained final Nibbāna without remainder, Ānanda, is a place worthy of seeing and that can inspire a sense of urgency in a faithful son of good family.

Imāni kho, ānanda, cattāri saddhassa kulaputtassa dassanīyāni saṁvejanīyāni ṭhānāni.

These, Ānanda, are the four places that are worthy of seeing and that can inspire a sense of urgency in a faithful son of good family.

Āgamissanti kho, ānanda, saddhā bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo: ‘idha tathāgato jāto’tipi, ‘idha tathāgato anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambuddho’tipi, ‘idha tathāgatena anuttaraṁ dhammacakkaṁ pavattitan’tipi, ‘idha tathāgato anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbuto’tipi.

Faithful disciples, nuns, laymen, and laywomen will come, Ānanda, saying, Here the Tathāgata was born, or Here the Tathāgata attained unsurpassed, perfect enlightenment, or Here the Tathāgata set in motion the unsurpassed Wheel of Dhamma, or Here the Tathāgata attained final Nibbāna without remainder.

Ye hi keci, ānanda, cetiyacārikaṁ āhiṇḍantā pasannacittā kālaṁ karissanti, sabbe te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissantī”ti.

Whoever, Ānanda, dies with a confident mind while on pilgrimage to these places, all of them, upon the breaking up of the body, after death, will be reborn in a good destination, in the heavenly world.

29. Ānandapucchākathā “Kathaṁ mayaṁ, bhante, mātugāme paṭipajjāmā”ti?

Ānanda's Question

How should we conduct ourselves, venerable sir, with regard to women?

“Adassanaṁ, ānandā”ti.

Do not see them, Ānanda.

“Dassane, bhagavā, sati kathaṁ paṭipajjitabban”ti?

But if we see them, Blessed One, how should we conduct ourselves?

“Anālāpo, ānandā”ti.

Do not speak to them, Ānanda.

“Ālapantena pana, bhante, kathaṁ paṭipajjitabban”ti?

But if we speak to them, venerable sir, how should we conduct ourselves?

“Sati, ānanda, upaṭṭhāpetabbā”ti.

Mindfulness, Ānanda, should be established.

“Kathaṁ mayaṁ, bhante, tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjāmā”ti?

How should we, venerable sir, proceed with the body of the Tathāgata?

“Abyāvaṭā tumhe, ānanda, hotha tathāgatassa sarīrapūjāya.

You, Ānanda, should be diligent in the worship of the Tathāgata's body.

Iṅgha tumhe, ānanda, sāratthe ghaṭatha anuyuñjatha, sāratthe appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharatha.

Strive earnestly, Ānanda, in the essence, be diligent, ardent, and resolute.

Santānanda, khattiyapaṇḍitāpi brāhmaṇapaṇḍitāpi gahapatipaṇḍitāpi tathāgate abhippasannā, te tathāgatassa sarīrapūjaṁ karissantī”ti.

There are wise nobles, wise brahmins, and wise householders who have deep faith in the Tathāgata; they will perform the worship of the Tathāgata's body.

“Kathaṁ pana, bhante, tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjitabban”ti?

But how, venerable sir, should we proceed with the body of the Tathāgata?

“Yathā kho, ānanda, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjanti, evaṁ tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjitabban”ti.

Just as they proceed with the body of a universal monarch, so should they proceed with the body of the Tathāgata.

“Kathaṁ pana, bhante, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjantī”ti?

But how, venerable sir, do they proceed with the body of a universal monarch?

“Rañño, ānanda, cakkavattissa sarīraṁ ahatena vatthena veṭhenti, ahatena vatthena veṭhetvā vihatena kappāsena veṭhenti, vihatena kappāsena veṭhetvā ahatena vatthena veṭhenti.

The body of a universal monarch, Ānanda, is wrapped in a new cloth, then wrapped in teased cotton, and again wrapped in a new cloth.

Etenupāyena pañcahi yugasatehi rañño cakkavattissa sarīraṁ veṭhetvā āyasāya teladoṇiyā pakkhipitvā aññissā āyasāya doṇiyā paṭikujjitvā sabbagandhānaṁ citakaṁ karitvā rañño cakkavattissa sarīraṁ jhāpenti.

In this manner, with five hundred layers, the body of a universal monarch is wrapped, placed in an iron oil vessel, covered with another iron vessel, and a pyre of all kinds of fragrant substances is prepared to cremate the body of the universal monarch.

Cātumahāpathe rañño cakkavattissa thūpaṁ karonti.

A stupa is built at the crossroads for the universal monarch.

Evaṁ kho, ānanda, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjanti.

In this way, Ānanda, they proceed with the body of a universal monarch.

Yathā kho, ānanda, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjanti, evaṁ tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjitabbaṁ.

Just as they proceed with the body of a universal monarch, so should they proceed with the body of the Tathāgata.

Cātumahāpathe tathāgatassa thūpo kātabbo.

A stupa should be built at the crossroads for the Tathāgata.

Tattha ye mālaṁ vā gandhaṁ vā cuṇṇakaṁ vā āropessanti vā abhivādessanti vā cittaṁ vā pasādessanti tesaṁ taṁ bhavissati dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya. 30.

Those who place flowers, incense, or powder there, or who pay homage or develop a serene mind, it will be for their long-lasting welfare and happiness.

Thūpārahapuggala Cattārome, ānanda, thūpārahā.

There are, Ānanda, four persons worthy of a stupa.

Katame cattāro?

Who are the four?

Tathāgato arahaṁ sammāsambuddho thūpāraho, paccekasambuddho thūpāraho, tathāgatassa sāvako thūpāraho, rājā cakkavattī thūpārahoti.

The Tathāgata, the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One is worthy of a stupa; the Paccekabuddha is worthy of a stupa; a disciple of the Tathāgata is worthy of a stupa; a universal monarch is worthy of a stupa.

Kiñcānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca tathāgato arahaṁ sammāsambuddho thūpāraho?

Why, Ānanda, is the Tathāgata, the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One worthy of a stupa?

‘Ayaṁ tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa thūpo’ti, ānanda, bahujanā cittaṁ pasādenti.

Because, Ānanda, many people will develop a serene mind thinking, This is the stupa of that Blessed One, the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One.

Te tattha cittaṁ pasādetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti.

Having developed a serene mind there, upon the dissolution of the body, after death, they will be reborn in a happy destination, in the heavenly world.

Idaṁ kho, ānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca tathāgato arahaṁ sammāsambuddho thūpāraho.

This, Ānanda, is the reason why the Tathāgata, the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One is worthy of a stupa.

Kiñcānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca paccekasambuddho thūpāraho?

Why, Ānanda, is the Paccekabuddha worthy of a stupa?

‘Ayaṁ tassa bhagavato paccekasambuddhassa thūpo’ti, ānanda, bahujanā cittaṁ pasādenti.

Because, Ānanda, many people will develop a serene mind thinking, This is the stupa of that Blessed One, the Paccekabuddha.

Te tattha cittaṁ pasādetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti.

Having inspired their minds there, upon the breaking up of the body, after death, they are reborn in a good destination, in the heavenly world.

Idaṁ kho, ānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca paccekasambuddho thūpāraho.

This, Ānanda, is the reason why a Paccekabuddha is worthy of a stupa.

Kiñcānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca tathāgatassa sāvako thūpāraho?

And why, Ānanda, is a disciple of the Tathāgata worthy of a stupa?

‘Ayaṁ tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa sāvakassa thūpo’ti, ānanda, bahujanā cittaṁ pasādenti.

This is the stupa of the disciple of the Blessed One, the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One, Ānanda, many people inspire their minds.

Te tattha cittaṁ pasādetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti.

Having inspired their minds there, upon the breaking up of the body, after death, they are reborn in a good destination, in the heavenly world.

Idaṁ kho, ānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca tathāgatassa sāvako thūpāraho.

This, Ānanda, is the reason why a disciple of the Tathāgata is worthy of a stupa.

Kiñcānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca rājā cakkavattī thūpāraho?

And why, Ānanda, is a wheel-turning monarch worthy of a stupa?

‘Ayaṁ tassa dhammikassa dhammarañño thūpo’ti, ānanda, bahujanā cittaṁ pasādenti.

This is the stupa of the righteous king of the Dhamma, Ānanda, many people inspire their minds.

Te tattha cittaṁ pasādetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti.

Having inspired their minds there, upon the breaking up of the body, after death, they are reborn in a good destination, in the heavenly world.

Idaṁ kho, ānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca rājā cakkavattī thūpāraho.

This, Ānanda, is the reason why a wheel-turning monarch is worthy of a stupa.

Ime kho, ānanda, cattāro thūpārahā”ti. 31.

These, Ānanda, are the four who are worthy of a stupa.

Ānandaacchariyadhamma Atha kho āyasmā ānando vihāraṁ pavisitvā kapisīsaṁ ālambitvā rodamāno aṭṭhāsi: “ahañca vatamhi sekho sakaraṇīyo, satthu ca me parinibbānaṁ bhavissati, yo mama anukampako”ti.

Then the Venerable Ānanda entered the dwelling, leaned against the doorpost, and stood weeping, I am still a learner with work to do, and my teacher is about to attain final Nibbāna, he who has been so compassionate to me.

Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “kahaṁ nu kho, bhikkhave, ānando”ti?

Then the Blessed One addressed the disciples, Where is Ānanda?

“Eso, bhante, āyasmā ānando vihāraṁ pavisitvā kapisīsaṁ ālambitvā rodamāno ṭhito: ‘ahañca vatamhi sekho sakaraṇīyo, satthu ca me parinibbānaṁ bhavissati, yo mama anukampako’”ti.

Venerable sir, the Venerable Ānanda has entered the dwelling, leaned against the doorpost, and is standing weeping, I am still a learner with work to do, and my teacher is about to attain final Nibbāna, he who has been so compassionate to me.

Atha kho bhagavā aññataraṁ bhikkhuṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, mama vacanena ānandaṁ āmantehi: ‘satthā taṁ, āvuso ānanda, āmantetī’”ti.

Then the Blessed One addressed a certain disciple, Come in my name, call Ānanda, saying, The Teacher calls you, friend Ānanda.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato paṭissutvā yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “satthā taṁ, āvuso ānanda, āmantetī”ti.

Yes, venerable sir, that disciple replied to the Blessed One, and he went to the Venerable Ānanda and said, The Teacher calls you, friend Ānanda.

“Evamāvuso”ti kho āyasmā ānando tassa bhikkhuno paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Yes, friend, the Venerable Ānanda replied to that disciple, and he went to the Blessed One, paid homage to him, and sat down to one side.

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “alaṁ, ānanda, mā soci mā paridevi, nanu etaṁ, ānanda, mayā paṭikacceva akkhātaṁ: ‘sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo aññathābhāvo’; taṁ kutettha, ānanda, labbhā.

Sitting to one side, the Blessed One said to the Venerable Ānanda, Enough, Ānanda, do not grieve, do not lament. Have I not already told you, Ānanda, that all that is dear and beloved must change, must become otherwise, must be separated?

Yaṁ taṁ jātaṁ bhūtaṁ saṅkhataṁ palokadhammaṁ, ‘taṁ vata tathāgatassāpi sarīraṁ mā palujjī’ti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.

How, Ānanda, can it be possible that what is born, come to being, conditioned, and subject to decay, should not pass away? That is not possible.

Dīgharattaṁ kho te, ānanda, tathāgato paccupaṭṭhito mettena kāyakammena hitena sukhena advayena appamāṇena, mettena vacīkammena hitena sukhena advayena appamāṇena, mettena manokammena hitena sukhena advayena appamāṇena.

For a long time, Ānanda, the Tathāgata has been supported by you with loving bodily actions that are beneficial, pleasant, non-dual, and immeasurable; with loving verbal actions that are beneficial, pleasant, non-dual, and immeasurable; with loving mental actions that are beneficial, pleasant, non-dual, and immeasurable.

Katapuññosi tvaṁ, ānanda, padhānamanuyuñja, khippaṁ hohisi anāsavo”ti.

You have accumulated merit, Ānanda, engage in striving, and you will soon be free from defilements.

Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “yepi te, bhikkhave, ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, tesampi bhagavantānaṁ etapparamāyeva upaṭṭhākā ahesuṁ, seyyathāpi mayhaṁ ānando.

Then the Blessed One addressed the disciples: Disciples, those who were Arahants, Perfectly Enlightened Ones in the past, had attendants of the highest order, just as Ānanda is to me.

Yepi te, bhikkhave, bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, tesampi bhagavantānaṁ etapparamāyeva upaṭṭhākā bhavissanti, seyyathāpi mayhaṁ ānando.

Those who will be Arahants, Perfectly Enlightened Ones in the future, will also have attendants of the highest order, just as Ānanda is to me.

Paṇḍito, bhikkhave, ānando; medhāvī, bhikkhave, ānando.

Ānanda is wise, disciples; Ānanda is intelligent, disciples.

Jānāti ‘ayaṁ kālo tathāgataṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ bhikkhūnaṁ, ayaṁ kālo bhikkhunīnaṁ, ayaṁ kālo upāsakānaṁ, ayaṁ kālo upāsikānaṁ, ayaṁ kālo rañño rājamahāmattānaṁ titthiyānaṁ titthiyasāvakānan’ti.

He knows the right time for disciples to approach the Tathāgata, the right time for nuns, the right time for laymen, the right time for laywomen, the right time for kings and royal ministers, and the right time for ascetics and their disciples.

Cattārome, bhikkhave, acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande.

There are these four wonderful and marvelous qualities in Ānanda.

Katame cattāro?

What are the four?

Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhuparisā ānandaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti.

If a group of disciples approaches Ānanda for a meeting, they are pleased by seeing him.

Tatra ce ānando dhammaṁ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti.

If Ānanda speaks the Dhamma, they are pleased by his words.

Atittāva, bhikkhave, bhikkhuparisā hoti, atha kho ānando tuṇhī hoti.

Even when the group of disciples is not satisfied, Ānanda remains silent.

Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhunīparisā ānandaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti.

If a group of nuns approaches Ānanda for a meeting, they are pleased by seeing him.

Tatra ce ānando dhammaṁ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti.

If Ānanda speaks the Dhamma, they are pleased by his words.

Atittāva, bhikkhave, bhikkhunīparisā hoti, atha kho ānando tuṇhī hoti.

Even when the group of nuns is not satisfied, Ānanda remains silent.

Sace, bhikkhave, upāsakaparisā ānandaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti.

If a group of laymen approaches Ānanda for a meeting, they are pleased by seeing him.

Tatra ce ānando dhammaṁ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti.

If Ānanda speaks the Dhamma, they are pleased by his words.

Atittāva, bhikkhave, upāsakaparisā hoti, atha kho ānando tuṇhī hoti.

Even when the group of laymen is not satisfied, Ānanda remains silent.

Sace, bhikkhave, upāsikāparisā ānandaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti.

If a group of laywomen approaches Ānanda for a meeting, they are pleased by seeing him.

Tatra ce ānando dhammaṁ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti.

If Ānanda speaks the Dhamma, they are pleased by his words.

Atittāva, bhikkhave, upāsikāparisā hoti, atha kho ānando tuṇhī hoti.

Even when the group of laywomen is not satisfied, Ānanda remains silent.

Ime kho, bhikkhave, cattāro acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande.

These are the four wonderful and marvelous qualities in Ānanda.

Cattārome, bhikkhave, acchariyā abbhutā dhammā raññe cakkavattimhi.

There are these four wonderful and marvelous qualities in a Wheel-Turning Monarch.

Katame cattāro?

What are the four?

Sace, bhikkhave, khattiyaparisā rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti.

If a group of nobles approaches the Wheel-Turning Monarch for a meeting, they are pleased by seeing him.

Tatra ce rājā cakkavattī bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti.

In that situation, if the king, the wheel-turning monarch, speaks, even with his speech, they are pleased.

Atittāva, bhikkhave, khattiyaparisā hoti.

Yet the assembly of nobles remains unsatisfied.

Atha kho rājā cakkavattī tuṇhī hoti.

Then the king, the wheel-turning monarch, remains silent.

If the assembly of brahmins approaches the king, the wheel-turning monarch, for an audience, they are pleased with the sight.

In that situation, if the king, the wheel-turning monarch, speaks, even with his speech, they are pleased.

Sace bhikkhave, brāhmaṇaparisā …pe…

Yet the assembly of brahmins remains unsatisfied.

gahapatiparisā …pe…

Then the king, the wheel-turning monarch, remains silent.

samaṇaparisā rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti.

If the assembly of householders approaches the king, the wheel-turning monarch, for an audience, they are pleased with the sight.

Tatra ce rājā cakkavattī bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti.

In that situation, if the king, the wheel-turning monarch, speaks, even with his speech, they are pleased.

Atittāva, bhikkhave, samaṇaparisā hoti.

Yet the assembly of householders remains unsatisfied.

Atha kho rājā cakkavattī tuṇhī hoti.

Then the king, the wheel-turning monarch, remains silent.

If the assembly of ascetics approaches the king, the wheel-turning monarch, for an audience, they are pleased with the sight.

Evameva kho, bhikkhave, cattārome acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande.

In that situation, if the king, the wheel-turning monarch, speaks, even with his speech, they are pleased.

Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhuparisā ānandaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti.

Yet the assembly of ascetics remains unsatisfied. Then the king, the wheel-turning monarch, remains silent.

Tatra ce ānando dhammaṁ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti.

Just so these four marvelous and wonderful qualities are in Ānanda.

If the assembly of disciples approaches Ānanda for an audience, they are pleased with the sight.

Atittāva, bhikkhave, bhikkhuparisā hoti. Atha kho ānando tuṇhī hoti.

In that situation, if Ānanda speaks the Dhamma, even with his speech, they are pleased.

Sace, bhikkhave bhikkhunīparisā …pe…

Yet the assembly of disciples remains unsatisfied.

upāsakaparisā …pe…

Then Ānanda remains silent.

upāsikāparisā ānandaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti.

If the assembly of nuns approaches Ānanda for an audience, they are pleased with the sight.

Tatra ce ānando dhammaṁ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti.

In that situation, if Ānanda speaks the Dhamma, even with his speech, they are pleased.

Atittāva, bhikkhave, upāsikāparisā hoti.

Yet the assembly of nuns remains unsatisfied.

Atha kho ānando tuṇhī hoti.

Then Ānanda remains silent.

Ime kho, bhikkhave, cattāro acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande”ti.

If the assembly of laymen approaches Ānanda for an audience, they are pleased with the sight.

32. Mahāsudassanasuttadesanā Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “mā, bhante, bhagavā imasmiṁ khuddakanagarake ujjaṅgalanagarake sākhānagarake parinibbāyi.

In that situation, if Ānanda speaks the Dhamma, even with his speech, they are pleased. Yet the assembly of laymen remains unsatisfied. Then Ānanda remains silent.

If the assembly of laywomen approaches Ānanda for an audience, they are pleased with the sight.

Santi, bhante, aññāni mahānagarāni, seyyathidaṁ— campā rājagahaṁ sāvatthī sāketaṁ kosambī bārāṇasī; ettha bhagavā parinibbāyatu.

In that situation, if Ānanda speaks the Dhamma, even with his speech, they are pleased. Yet the assembly of laywomen remains unsatisfied. Then Ānanda remains silent.

Ettha bahū khattiyamahāsālā, brāhmaṇamahāsālā gahapatimahāsālā tathāgate abhippasannā.

These are the four wonderful and marvelous qualities in Ānanda.

These are the four marvelous and wonderful qualities in Ānanda.

Te tathāgatassa sarīrapūjaṁ karissantī”ti “mā hevaṁ, ānanda, avaca, mā hevaṁ, ānanda, avaca: ‘khuddakanagarakaṁ ujjaṅgalanagarakaṁ sākhānagarakan’ti.

Thus was said, the Venerable Ānanda addressed the Blessed One: Venerable sir, may the Blessed One not attain final Nibbāna in this small, remote town, this branch town.

Bhūtapubbaṁ, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano nāma ahosi cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato.

There are, venerable sir, other great cities, such as Campā, Rājagaha, Sāvatthī, Sāketa, Kosambī, Bārāṇasī; let the Blessed One attain final Nibbāna there.

Rañño, ānanda, mahāsudassanassa ayaṁ kusinārā kusāvatī nāma rājadhānī ahosi.

There, many great noble families, great brahmin families, great householder families are devoted to the Tathāgata.

puratthimena ca pacchimena ca dvādasayojanāni āyāmena; uttarena ca dakkhiṇena ca sattayojanāni vitthārena.

They will perform the funeral rites for the Tathāgata.

Do not say so, Ānanda, do not say so, Ānanda, that this is a small, remote town, a branch town.

Kusāvatī, ānanda, rājadhānī iddhā ceva ahosi phītā ca bahujanā ca ākiṇṇamanussā ca subhikkhā ca. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, devānaṁ āḷakamandā nāma rājadhānī iddhā ceva hoti phītā ca bahujanā ca ākiṇṇayakkhā ca subhikkhā ca; evameva kho, ānanda, kusāvatī rājadhānī iddhā ceva ahosi phītā ca bahujanā ca ākiṇṇamanussā ca subhikkhā ca.

Once upon a time, Ānanda, there was a king named Mahāsudassana, a wheel-turning monarch, a righteous king, a conqueror of the four quarters, who had attained stability in his realm, and was endowed with the seven treasures. For King Mahāsudassana, Ānanda, this Kusinārā was the capital named Kusāvatī.

It extended twelve leagues from east to west, and seven leagues from north to south.

Kusāvatī, ānanda, rājadhānī dasahi saddehi avivittā ahosi divā ceva rattiñca, seyyathidaṁ— hatthisaddena assasaddena rathasaddena bherisaddena mudiṅgasaddena vīṇāsaddena gītasaddena saṅkhasaddena sammasaddena pāṇitāḷasaddena ‘asnātha pivatha khādathā’ti dasamena saddena.

Kusāvatī, Ānanda, was a prosperous, flourishing, populous, crowded, and abundant city. Just as, Ānanda, the city of the gods named Āḷakamandā is prosperous, flourishing, populous, crowded with yakkhas, and abundant. Just so, Ānanda, the city of Kusāvatī was prosperous, flourishing, populous, crowded with people, and abundant in food.

Kusāvatī, Ānanda, the capital city, was not devoid of ten sounds both by day and by night, namely: the sound of elephants, the sound of horses, the sound of chariots, the sound of drums, the sound of tabors, the sound of lutes, the sound of singing, the sound of conch shells, the sound of cymbals, and the tenth sound, the sound of people saying, Bathe, drink, eat.

Gaccha tvaṁ, ānanda, kusināraṁ pavisitvā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ ārocehi: ‘ajja kho, vāseṭṭhā, rattiyā pacchime yāme tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati.

Go, Ānanda, enter Kusināra and announce to the Mallas of Kusināra: Today, Vāseṭṭhā, in the last watch of the night, the Tathāgata will attain final Nibbāna.

Abhikkamatha, vāseṭṭhā, abhikkamatha, vāseṭṭhā.

Proceed, Vāseṭṭhā, proceed, Vāseṭṭhā.

Mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvattha— amhākañca no gāmakkhette tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ ahosi, na mayaṁ labhimhā pacchime kāle tathāgataṁ dassanāyā’”ti.

Do not later regret, thinking, In our own village territory, the Tathāgata attained final Nibbāna, and we did not get to see the Tathāgata in his last moments.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya attadutiyo kusināraṁ pāvisi. 33. Mallānaṁvandanā Tena kho pana samayena kosinārakā mallā sandhāgāre sannipatitā honti kenacideva karaṇīyena.

Yes, venerable sir, replied the Venerable Ānanda to the Blessed One, and having put on his robe and taking his bowl and outer robe, he entered Kusināra with a companion. At that time, the Mallas of Kusināra were gathered in the assembly hall for some business.

Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ sandhāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ ārocesi: “ajja kho, vāseṭṭhā, rattiyā pacchime yāme tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati.

Then the Venerable Ānanda approached the assembly hall of the Mallas of Kusināra and announced to them: Today, Vāseṭṭhā, in the last watch of the night, the Tathāgata will attain final Nibbāna.

Abhikkamatha, vāseṭṭhā, abhikkamatha, vāseṭṭhā.

Proceed, Vāseṭṭhā, proceed, Vāseṭṭhā.

Mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvattha: ‘amhākañca no gāmakkhette tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ ahosi, na mayaṁ labhimhā pacchime kāle tathāgataṁ dassanāyā’”ti.

Do not later regret, thinking, In our own village territory, the Tathāgata attained final Nibbāna, and we did not get to see the Tathāgata in his last moments.

Idamāyasmato ānandassa vacanaṁ sutvā mallā ca mallaputtā ca mallasuṇisā ca mallapajāpatiyo ca aghāvino dummanā cetodukkhasamappitā appekacce kese pakiriya kandanti, bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti vivaṭṭanti: “atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbāyissati, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbāyissati, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antaradhāyissatī”ti.

Hearing the words of the Venerable Ānanda, the Mallas, their sons, their daughters-in-law, and their wives, afflicted with sorrow and overwhelmed with grief, some with disheveled hair, wept, raising their arms, and fell down, rolling back and forth, saying, Too soon will the Blessed One attain final Nibbāna, too soon will the Well-Gone One attain final Nibbāna, too soon will the eye of the world disappear.

Atha kho mallā ca mallaputtā ca mallasuṇisā ca mallapajāpatiyo ca aghāvino dummanā cetodukkhasamappitā yena upavattanaṁ mallānaṁ sālavanaṁ yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkamiṁsu.

Then the Mallas, their sons, their daughters-in-law, and their wives, afflicted with sorrow and overwhelmed with grief, went to the Sāla grove of the Mallas at Upavattana, where the Venerable Ānanda was.

Atha kho āyasmato ānandassa etadahosi: “sace kho ahaṁ kosinārake malle ekamekaṁ bhagavantaṁ vandāpessāmi, avandito bhagavā kosinārakehi mallehi bhavissati, athāyaṁ ratti vibhāyissati.

Then it occurred to the Venerable Ānanda: If I make each of the Mallas pay homage to the Blessed One, the Blessed One will not be honored by the Mallas, and the night will pass away.

Yannūnāhaṁ kosinārake malle kulaparivattaso kulaparivattaso ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṁ vandāpeyyaṁ: ‘itthannāmo, bhante, mallo saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī’”ti.

Suppose I were to have the Mallas of Kusinara, family by family, pay homage to the Blessed One, saying, Venerable Sir, such and such a Malla, with his son, wife, retinue, and companions, bows his head at the feet of the Blessed One.

Atha kho āyasmā ānando kosinārake malle kulaparivattaso kulaparivattaso ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṁ vandāpesi: “itthannāmo, bhante, mallo saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī”ti.

Then the Venerable Ananda had the Mallas of Kusinara, family by family, pay homage to the Blessed One, saying, Venerable Sir, such and such a Malla, with his son, wife, retinue, and companions, bows his head at the feet of the Blessed One.

Atha kho āyasmā ānando etena upāyena paṭhameneva yāmena kosinārake malle bhagavantaṁ vandāpesi. 34.

In this manner, the Venerable Ananda had the Mallas of Kusinara pay homage to the Blessed One during the first watch of the night.

Subhaddaparibbājakavatthu Tena kho pana samayena subhaddo nāma paribbājako kusinārāyaṁ paṭivasati.

The Story of the Wanderer Subhadda At that time, there was a wanderer named Subhadda residing in Kusinara.

Assosi kho subhaddo paribbājako: “ajja kira rattiyā pacchime yāme samaṇassa gotamassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissatī”ti.

Subhadda heard, Tonight, in the last watch of the night, the final passing away of the recluse Gotama will occur.

Atha kho subhaddassa paribbājakassa etadahosi: “sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ paribbājakānaṁ vuḍḍhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘kadāci karahaci tathāgatā loke uppajjanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā’ti.

Then it occurred to Subhadda, the wanderer, I have heard from the elder wanderers, the aged teachers and preceptors, saying, Rarely do Tathagatas, Arahants, Fully Enlightened Ones arise in the world.

Ajjeva rattiyā pacchime yāme samaṇassa gotamassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati.

Tonight, in the last watch of the night, the final passing away of the recluse Gotama will occur.

Atthi ca me ayaṁ kaṅkhādhammo uppanno, evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ samaṇe gotame, ‘pahoti me samaṇo gotamo tathā dhammaṁ desetuṁ, yathāhaṁ imaṁ kaṅkhādhammaṁ pajaheyyan’”ti.

I have this doubt arisen, and I am so inclined towards the recluse Gotama, May the recluse Gotama teach me the Dhamma in such a way that I may abandon this doubt.

Atha kho subhaddo paribbājako yena upavattanaṁ mallānaṁ sālavanaṁ, yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bho ānanda, paribbājakānaṁ vuḍḍhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘kadāci karahaci tathāgatā loke uppajjanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā’ti.

Then Subhadda, the wanderer, approached the grove of the Mallas at Upavattana, where the Venerable Ananda was, and addressed him, I have heard, friend Ananda, from the elder wanderers, the aged teachers and preceptors, saying, Rarely do Tathagatas, Arahants, Fully Enlightened Ones arise in the world.

Ajjeva rattiyā pacchime yāme samaṇassa gotamassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati.

Tonight, in the last watch of the night, the final passing away of the recluse Gotama will occur.

Atthi ca me ayaṁ kaṅkhādhammo uppanno— evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ samaṇe gotame ‘pahoti me samaṇo gotamo tathā dhammaṁ desetuṁ, yathāhaṁ imaṁ kaṅkhādhammaṁ pajaheyyan’ti.

I have this doubt arisen, and I am so inclined towards the recluse Gotama, May the recluse Gotama teach me the Dhamma in such a way that I may abandon this doubt.

Sādhāhaṁ, bho ānanda, labheyyaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāyā”ti.

Therefore, friend Ananda, may I be granted an audience with the recluse Gotama.

Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando subhaddaṁ paribbājakaṁ etadavoca: “alaṁ, āvuso subhadda, mā tathāgataṁ viheṭhesi, kilanto bhagavā”ti.

Having been thus addressed, the Venerable Ananda said to Subhadda, the wanderer, Enough, friend Subhadda, do not trouble the Tathagata. The Blessed One is weary.

Dutiyampi kho subhaddo paribbājako …pe…

For the second time, Subhadda, the wanderer, ...

tatiyampi kho subhaddo paribbājako āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bho ānanda, paribbājakānaṁ vuḍḍhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘kadāci karahaci tathāgatā loke uppajjanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā’ti.

and for the third time, Subhadda, the wanderer, addressed the Venerable Ananda, I have heard, friend Ananda, from the elder wanderers, the aged teachers and preceptors, saying... At times, indeed, Tathagatas, the Arahants, the Perfectly Enlightened Ones, arise in the world.

Ajjeva rattiyā pacchime yāme samaṇassa gotamassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati.

Tonight, in the last watch of the night, the final passing away of the ascetic Gotama will occur.

Atthi ca me ayaṁ kaṅkhādhammo uppanno— evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ samaṇe gotame, ‘pahoti me samaṇo gotamo tathā dhammaṁ desetuṁ, yathāhaṁ imaṁ kaṅkhādhammaṁ pajaheyyan’ti.

I have this doubt that has arisen: I am so confident in the ascetic Gotama, that he is capable of teaching the Dhamma in such a way that I might abandon this doubt.

Sādhāhaṁ, bho ānanda, labheyyaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāyā”ti.

Therefore, I wish, venerable Ananda, to see the ascetic Gotama.

Tatiyampi kho āyasmā ānando subhaddaṁ paribbājakaṁ etadavoca: “alaṁ, āvuso subhadda, mā tathāgataṁ viheṭhesi, kilanto bhagavā”ti.

For the third time, Venerable Ananda said to Subhadda the wanderer, Enough, friend Subhadda, do not trouble the Tathagata; the Blessed One is weary.

Assosi kho bhagavā āyasmato ānandassa subhaddena paribbājakena saddhiṁ imaṁ kathāsallāpaṁ.

The Blessed One heard the conversation between Venerable Ananda and Subhadda the wanderer.

Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “alaṁ, ānanda, mā subhaddaṁ vāresi, labhataṁ, ānanda, subhaddo tathāgataṁ dassanāya.

Then the Blessed One addressed Venerable Ananda, Enough, Ananda, do not prevent Subhadda. Let Subhadda see the Tathagata.

Yaṁ kiñci maṁ subhaddo pucchissati, sabbaṁ taṁ aññāpekkhova pucchissati, no vihesāpekkho.

Whatever Subhadda asks me, he will ask with the intention of gaining knowing, not with the intention of causing trouble.

Yañcassāhaṁ puṭṭho byākarissāmi, taṁ khippameva ājānissatī”ti.

Whatever I explain to him, he will quickly know.

Atha kho āyasmā ānando subhaddaṁ paribbājakaṁ etadavoca: “gacchāvuso subhadda, karoti te bhagavā okāsan”ti.

Then Venerable Ananda said to Subhadda the wanderer, Go, friend Subhadda, the Blessed One gives you permission.

Atha kho subhaddo paribbājako yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Then Subhadda the wanderer approached the Blessed One.

Having approached, he exchanged greetings with the Blessed One, and after this courteous and friendly exchange, he sat down to one side.

Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho subhaddo paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “yeme, bho gotama, samaṇabrāhmaṇā saṅghino gaṇino gaṇācariyā ñātā yasassino titthakarā sādhusammatā bahujanassa, seyyathidaṁ—pūraṇo kassapo, makkhali gosālo, ajito kesakambalo, pakudho kaccāyano, sañcayo belaṭṭhaputto, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto, sabbete sakāya paṭiññāya abbhaññiṁsu, sabbeva na abbhaññiṁsu, udāhu ekacce abbhaññiṁsu, ekacce na abbhaññiṁsū”ti?

Sitting to one side, Subhadda the wanderer said to the Blessed One, Venerable Gotama, those ascetics and brahmins who are leaders of groups, heads of orders, well-known and famous founders of sects, regarded as good by many people, such as Purana Kassapa, Makkhali Gosala, Ajita Kesakambala, Pakudha Kaccayana, Sanjaya Belatthaputta, and Nigantha Nataputta: did all of them realize the truth as they claimed, or did none of them realize it, or did some realize it and some not?

Enough, Subhadda, let that be.

“Alaṁ, subhadda, tiṭṭhatetaṁ: ‘sabbete sakāya paṭiññāya abbhaññiṁsu, sabbeva na abbhaññiṁsu, udāhu ekacce abbhaññiṁsu, ekacce na abbhaññiṁsū’ti. Dhammaṁ te, subhadda, desessāmi; taṁ suṇāhi sādhukaṁ manasikarohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.

I will teach you the Dhamma, Subhadda; listen carefully, pay close attention, and I will speak.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho subhaddo paribbājako bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, venerable sir, Subhadda the wanderer replied to the Blessed One.

Bhagavā etadavoca: “Yasmiṁ kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo na upalabbhati, samaṇopi tattha na upalabbhati.

The Blessed One said, In whatever Dhamma and discipline the Noble Eightfold Path is not found, there no true ascetic is found.

Dutiyopi tattha samaṇo na upalabbhati. Tatiyopi tattha samaṇo na upalabbhati. Catutthopi tattha samaṇo na upalabbhati.

In the second, third, and fourth instances, no true ascetic is found there either.

Yasmiñca kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo upalabbhati, samaṇopi tattha upalabbhati, dutiyopi tattha samaṇo upalabbhati, tatiyopi tattha samaṇo upalabbhati, catutthopi tattha samaṇo upalabbhati.

In whatever doctrine and discipline, Subhadda, the Noble Eightfold Path is found, there also is found a true recluse, a second recluse, a third recluse, and a fourth recluse.

Imasmiṁ kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo upalabbhati, idheva, subhadda, samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo, idha tatiyo samaṇo, idha catuttho samaṇo, suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehi.

In this doctrine and discipline, Subhadda, the Noble Eightfold Path is found; here alone, Subhadda, is there a true recluse, here a second recluse, here a third recluse, here a fourth recluse. Other doctrines are devoid of true recluses.

Ime ca, subhadda, bhikkhū sammā vihareyyuṁ, asuñño loko arahantehi assāti.

If these disciples, Subhadda, live rightly, the world will not be devoid of arahants.

Ekūnatiṁso vayasā subhadda, Yaṁ pabbajiṁ kiṅkusalānuesī; Vassāni paññāsa samādhikāni, Yato ahaṁ pabbajito subhadda; Ñāyassa dhammassa padesavattī, Ito bahiddhā samaṇopi natthi. Dutiyopi samaṇo natthi.

At the age of twenty-nine, Subhadda, I went forth seeking what is good. For over fifty years, since I went forth, Subhadda, I have been a wanderer.

In this doctrine and discipline, there is no recluse outside of it.

Tatiyopi samaṇo natthi. Catutthopi samaṇo natthi.

There is no second recluse, no third recluse, no fourth recluse.

Suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehi.

Other doctrines are devoid of true recluses.

Ime ca, subhadda, bhikkhū sammā vihareyyuṁ, asuñño loko arahantehi assā”ti.

If these disciples, Subhadda, live rightly, the world will not be devoid of arahants.

Evaṁ vutte, subhaddo paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante.

Having said this, Subhadda the wanderer spoke to the Blessed One: Excellent, Lord, excellent, Lord!

Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito.

Just as if one were to set upright what was overturned, to reveal what was hidden, to show the way to one who was lost, or to hold a lamp in the dark so that those with eyes could see forms, in the same way, the Blessed One has made the Dhamma clear in many ways.

Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca.

I go to the Blessed One for refuge, to the Dhamma, and to the community of disciples.

Labheyyāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, labheyyaṁ upasampadan”ti.

May I receive the going forth in the presence of the Blessed One, may I receive the full ordination.

“Yo kho, subhadda, aññatitthiyapubbo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhati pabbajjaṁ, ākaṅkhati upasampadaṁ, so cattāro māse parivasati.

Subhadda, if someone from another sect desires the going forth and full ordination in this doctrine and discipline, they must wait for four months.

Catunnaṁ māsānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājenti upasampādenti bhikkhubhāvāya.

At the end of four months, if the disciples are satisfied with their conduct, they give the going forth and full ordination.

Api ca mettha puggalavemattatā viditā”ti.

However, I have recognized individual differences in this matter.

“Sace, bhante, aññatitthiyapubbā imasmiṁ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhantā pabbajjaṁ ākaṅkhantā upasampadaṁ cattāro māse parivasanti, catunnaṁ māsānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājenti upasampādenti bhikkhubhāvāya.

If those from another sect, desiring the going forth and full ordination in this doctrine and discipline, wait for four months, and at the end of four months, if the disciples are satisfied with their conduct, they give the going forth and full ordination, then I will wait for four years.

Ahaṁ cattāri vassāni parivasissāmi, catunnaṁ vassānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājentu upasampādentu bhikkhubhāvāyā”ti.

At the end of four years, if the disciples are satisfied with my conduct, let them give me the going forth and full ordination.

Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “tenahānanda, subhaddaṁ pabbājehī”ti.

Then the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ānanda: Ānanda, give Subhadda the going forth.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.

Yes, Lord, the Venerable Ānanda replied to the Blessed One.

Atha kho subhaddo paribbājako āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “lābhā vo, āvuso ānanda; suladdhaṁ vo, āvuso ānanda, ye ettha satthu sammukhā antevāsikābhisekena abhisittā”ti.

Then Subhadda the wanderer spoke to the Venerable Ānanda. Fortunate are you, friend Ānanda; well-gained is it for you, friend Ānanda, who have been anointed here in the presence of the Teacher with the ordination of a disciple.

Alattha kho subhaddo paribbājako bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, alattha upasampadaṁ.

Subhadda the wanderer received ordination in the presence of the Blessed One, and he attained full ordination.

Acirūpasampanno kho panāyasmā subhaddo eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti—tadanuttaraṁ brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsi. “Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā”ti abbhaññāsi.

Having quickly attained full ordination, the Venerable Subhadda, living alone, diligent, ardent, and resolute, soon realized for himself, through direct knowing, the ultimate goal of the holy life for which sons of good families rightly go forth from the household life into homelessness, and he dwelled having attained it: Birth is destroyed, the holy life has been lived, what had to be done has been done, there is no more of this state of being.

Aññataro kho panāyasmā subhaddo arahataṁ ahosi.

The Venerable Subhadda became one of the arahants.

So bhagavato pacchimo sakkhisāvako ahosīti.

He was the last direct disciple of the Blessed One.

Pañcamo bhāṇavāro.

This is the fifth recitation section.

35. Tathāgatapacchimavācā Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “siyā kho panānanda, tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘atītasatthukaṁ pāvacanaṁ, natthi no satthā’ti.

The Last Words of the Tathāgata

Then the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ānanda: It might be, Ānanda, that you would think, The teaching has lost its teacher, we have no teacher.

Na kho panetaṁ, ānanda, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ.

It should not be seen in this way, Ānanda.

Yo vo, ānanda, mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto, so vo mamaccayena satthā.

Whatever Dhamma and Vinaya I have taught and laid down, that will be your teacher after my passing.

Yathā kho panānanda, etarahi bhikkhū aññamaññaṁ āvusovādena samudācaranti, na kho mamaccayena evaṁ samudācaritabbaṁ.

Just as, Ānanda, the disciples now address each other as friend, so should it not be done after my passing.

Theratarena, ānanda, bhikkhunā navakataro bhikkhu nāmena vā gottena vā āvusovādena vā samudācaritabbo.

A junior disciple should address a senior disciple by name or as Venerable.

Navakatarena bhikkhunā therataro bhikkhu ‘bhante’ti vā ‘āyasmā’ti vā samudācaritabbo.

A senior disciple should address a junior disciple as friend or by name.

Ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, saṅgho mamaccayena khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni samūhanatu.

If the Sangha wishes, Ānanda, it may abolish the lesser and minor rules after my passing.

Channassa, ānanda, bhikkhuno mamaccayena brahmadaṇḍo dātabbo”ti.

A brahmadanda should be given to Channa after my passing.

“Katamo pana, bhante, brahmadaṇḍo”ti?

What, Venerable Sir, is a brahmadanda?

“Channo, ānanda, bhikkhu yaṁ iccheyya, taṁ vadeyya.

Channa, Ānanda, may say whatever he wishes.

So bhikkhūhi neva vattabbo, na ovaditabbo, na anusāsitabbo”ti.

He should neither be spoken to, nor advised, nor instructed by the disciples.

Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, ekabhikkhussāpi kaṅkhā vā vimati vā buddhe vā dhamme vā saṅghe vā magge vā paṭipadāya vā, pucchatha, bhikkhave, mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvattha: ‘sammukhībhūto no satthā ahosi, na mayaṁ sakkhimhā bhagavantaṁ sammukhā paṭipucchitun’”ti.

Then the Blessed One addressed the disciples: It might be that there is doubt or uncertainty in one of you regarding the Tathāgata, the Dhamma, the Sangha, the path, or the practice. Ask do not later regret, thinking, The Teacher was present before us, and we did not ask the Blessed One directly.

Evaṁ vutte, te bhikkhū tuṇhī ahesuṁ.

Having said this, the disciples remained silent.

Dutiyampi kho bhagavā …pe…

A second time the Blessed One...

tatiyampi kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, ekabhikkhussāpi kaṅkhā vā vimati vā buddhe vā dhamme vā saṅghe vā magge vā paṭipadāya vā, pucchatha, bhikkhave, mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvattha: ‘sammukhībhūto no satthā ahosi, na mayaṁ sakkhimhā bhagavantaṁ sammukhā paṭipucchitun’”ti.

and a third time the Blessed One addressed the disciples: It might be that there is doubt or uncertainty in one of you regarding the Tathāgata, the Dhamma, the Sangha, the path, or the practice. Ask do not later regret. The Teacher was not present before us, and we were not able to ask the Blessed One directly.

Tatiyampi kho te bhikkhū tuṇhī ahesuṁ.

For the third time, the disciples remained silent.

Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, satthugāravenapi na puccheyyātha.

Then the Blessed One addressed the disciples, Perhaps out of reverence for the Teacher, you do not ask.

Sahāyakopi, bhikkhave, sahāyakassa ārocetū”ti.

Let a friend inform a friend.

Evaṁ vutte, te bhikkhū tuṇhī ahesuṁ.

Having said this, the disciples remained silent.

Atha kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante, evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ, bhante, imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe, ‘natthi ekabhikkhussāpi kaṅkhā vā vimati vā buddhe vā dhamme vā saṅghe vā magge vā paṭipadāya vā’”ti.

Then Venerable Ānanda spoke to the Blessed One, It is wonderful, Lord, it is marvelous, Lord, how I am so confident, Lord, in this assembly of disciples, that there is not even a single disciple who has doubt or uncertainty about the Tathāgata, the Dhamma, the Sangha, the path, or the practice.

“Pasādā kho tvaṁ, ānanda, vadesi, ñāṇameva hettha, ānanda, tathāgatassa.

You speak from confidence, Ānanda, but here, Ānanda, it is knowing of the Tathāgata.

Natthi imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe ekabhikkhussāpi kaṅkhā vā vimati vā buddhe vā dhamme vā saṅghe vā magge vā paṭipadāya vā.

In this assembly of disciples, there is not even a single disciple who has doubt or uncertainty about the Tathāgata, the Dhamma, the Sangha, the path, or the practice.

Imesañhi, ānanda, pañcannaṁ bhikkhusatānaṁ yo pacchimako bhikkhu, so sotāpanno avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo”ti.

For, Ānanda, among these five hundred disciples, the last disciple is a stream-enterer, not subject to downfall, assured, and destined for full awakening.

Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “handa dāni, bhikkhave, āmantayāmi vo, vayadhammā saṅkhārā appamādena sampādethā”ti.

Then the Blessed One addressed the disciples, Now I address you: all conditioned things are subject to decay. Strive on with diligence.

Ayaṁ tathāgatassa pacchimā vācā.

These were the Tathāgata's last words.

36. Parinibbutakathā Atha kho bhagavā paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, paṭhamajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, dutiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, tatiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā catutthaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samāpajji, ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samāpajji, viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samāpajji, ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samāpajji, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpajji.

Then the Blessed One entered the first jhāna, emerging from the first jhāna, he entered the second jhāna, emerging from the second jhāna, he entered the third jhāna, emerging from the third jhāna, he entered the fourth jhāna, emerging from the fourth jhāna, he entered the realm of infinite space, emerging from the realm of infinite space, he entered the realm of infinite consciousness, emerging from the realm of infinite consciousness, he entered the realm of nothingness, emerging from the realm of nothingness, he entered the realm of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, emerging from the realm of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, he entered the cessation of perception and feeling.

Atha kho āyasmā ānando āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ etadavoca: “parinibbuto, bhante anuruddha, bhagavā”ti.

Then Venerable Ānanda said to Venerable Anuruddha, Venerable Anuruddha, the Blessed One has attained final Nibbāna.

“Nāvuso ānanda, bhagavā parinibbuto, saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpanno”ti.

Friend Ānanda, the Blessed One has not attained final Nibbāna, he has entered the cessation of perception and feeling.

Atha kho bhagavā saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samāpajji, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samāpajji, ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samāpajji, viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samāpajji, ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā catutthaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, tatiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, dutiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, paṭhamajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, dutiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, tatiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā catutthaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā samanantarā bhagavā parinibbāyi.

Then the Blessed One, emerging from the cessation of perception and feeling, entered the realm of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, emerging from the realm of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, he entered the realm of nothingness, emerging from the realm of nothingness, he entered the realm of infinite consciousness, emerging from the realm of infinite consciousness, he entered the realm of infinite space, emerging from the realm of infinite space, he entered the fourth jhāna, emerging from the fourth jhāna, he entered the third jhāna, emerging from the third jhāna, he entered the second jhāna, emerging from the second jhāna, he entered the first jhāna, emerging from the first jhāna.

Then the Blessed One entered the second jhāna, emerging from the second jhāna, he entered the third jhāna, emerging from the third jhāna, he entered the fourth jhāna, and emerging from the fourth jhāna, immediately, the Blessed One attained final Nibbāna.

Parinibbute bhagavati saha parinibbānā mahābhūmicālo ahosi bhiṁsanako salomahaṁso.

Upon the passing of the Blessed One, at the moment of his final Nibbāna, there was a great and terrifying earthquake, causing the hair to stand on end.

Devadundubhiyo ca phaliṁsu.

The celestial drums resounded.

Parinibbute bhagavati saha parinibbānā brahmāsahampati imaṁ gāthaṁ abhāsi: “Sabbeva nikkhipissanti, bhūtā loke samussayaṁ; Yattha etādiso satthā, loke appaṭipuggalo; Tathāgato balappatto, sambuddho parinibbuto”ti.

At the moment of the Blessed One's final Nibbāna, Brahmā Sahampati uttered this verse: All beings in the world will lay down their bodies; where such a teacher, unparalleled in the world, the Tathāgata, endowed with strength, the Fully Enlightened One, has attained final Nibbāna.

Parinibbute bhagavati saha parinibbānā sakko devānamindo imaṁ gāthaṁ abhāsi: “Aniccā vata saṅkhārā, uppādavayadhammino; Uppajjitvā nirujjhanti, tesaṁ vūpasamo sukho”ti.

At the moment of the Blessed One's final Nibbāna, Sakka, the lord of the gods, uttered this verse: Impermanent indeed are formations, subject to arising and ceasing; having arisen, they cease; their calming is bliss.

Parinibbute bhagavati saha parinibbānā āyasmā anuruddho imā gāthāyo abhāsi: “Nāhu assāsapassāso, ṭhitacittassa tādino; Anejo santimārabbha, yaṁ kālamakarī muni.

At the moment of the Blessed One's final Nibbāna, the Venerable Anuruddha uttered these verses: There was no in-breath or out-breath for the one whose mind was steadfast; unshaken, having attained peace, the sage passed away.

Asallīnena cittena, vedanaṁ ajjhavāsayi; Pajjotasseva nibbānaṁ, vimokkho cetaso ahū”ti.

With an untroubled mind, he endured sensation; like the extinguishing of a lamp, there was liberation of the mind.

Parinibbute bhagavati saha parinibbānā āyasmā ānando imaṁ gāthaṁ abhāsi: “Tadāsi yaṁ bhiṁsanakaṁ, tadāsi lomahaṁsanaṁ; Sabbākāravarūpete, sambuddhe parinibbute”ti.

At the moment of the Blessed One's final Nibbāna, the Venerable Ānanda uttered this verse: It was indeed terrifying, it was indeed hair-raising, when the Fully Enlightened One, adorned with all excellent qualities, attained final Nibbāna.

Parinibbute bhagavati ye te tattha bhikkhū avītarāgā appekacce bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti vivaṭṭanti, “atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antarahito”ti.

Upon the passing of the Blessed One, some disciples there who were not free from passion raised their arms and wept, falling down, rolling back and forth, lamenting, Too soon has the Blessed One attained final Nibbāna, too soon has the Well-Gone One attained final Nibbāna, too soon has the eye of the world disappeared.

Ye pana te bhikkhū vītarāgā, te satā sampajānā adhivāsenti: “aniccā saṅkhārā, taṁ kutettha labbhā”ti.

But those disciples who were free from passion endured mindfully and with full awareness, saying, Impermanent are formations; what is there to lament?

Atha kho āyasmā anuruddho bhikkhū āmantesi: “alaṁ, āvuso, mā socittha mā paridevittha.

Then the Venerable Anuruddha addressed the disciples, Enough, friends, do not grieve, do not lament.

Nanu etaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā paṭikacceva akkhātaṁ: ‘sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo aññathābhāvo’.

Did not the Blessed One declare to us, All that is dear and pleasing will undergo change, separation, and alteration?

Taṁ kutettha, āvuso, labbhā.

What is there to be found here?

‘Yaṁ taṁ jātaṁ bhūtaṁ saṅkhataṁ palokadhammaṁ, taṁ vata mā palujjī’ti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.

That which is born, come into being, formed, and subject to decay, how can it not decay? Such a state does not exist.

Devatā, āvuso, ujjhāyantī”ti.

Friends, the deities are lamenting.

“Kathaṁbhūtā pana, bhante, āyasmā anuruddho devatā manasi karotī”ti?

How, venerable sir, does the Venerable Anuruddha perceive the deities?

“Santāvuso ānanda, devatā ākāse pathavīsaññiniyo kese pakiriya kandanti, bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti: ‘atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antarahito’ti. Santāvuso ānanda, devatā pathaviyā pathavīsaññiniyo kese pakiriya kandanti, bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti: ‘atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antarahito’ti.

they asked. Friends Ānanda, the deities in the sky, perceiving the earth, are scattering their hair and weeping, raising their arms and weeping, falling down, rolling back and forth, lamenting, Too soon has the Blessed One attained final Nibbāna, too soon has the Well-Gone One attained final Nibbāna, too soon has the eye of the world disappeared. Friends Ānanda, the deities on the earth, perceiving the earth, are scattering their hair and weeping, raising their arms and weeping, falling down, rolling back and forth, lamenting.

Yā pana tā devatā vītarāgā, tā satā sampajānā adhivāsenti: ‘aniccā saṅkhārā, taṁ kutettha labbhā’”ti.

The Blessed One has passed away too soon, the Well-Gone One has passed away too soon, the Eye of the world has disappeared too soon.

However, those deities who are free from passion, they endure with mindfulness and full awareness, thinking, Formations are impermanent; what can be found here?

Atha kho āyasmā ca anuruddho āyasmā ca ānando taṁ rattāvasesaṁ dhammiyā kathāya vītināmesuṁ.

Then, Venerable Anuruddha and Venerable Ānanda spent the remainder of the night in a discourse on the Dhamma.

Atha kho āyasmā anuruddho āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “gacchāvuso ānanda, kusināraṁ pavisitvā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ ārocehi: ‘parinibbuto, vāseṭṭhā, bhagavā, yassadāni kālaṁ maññathā’”ti.

Then Venerable Anuruddha addressed Venerable Ānanda, Go, friend Ānanda, enter Kusinārā and inform the Mallas of Kusinārā, The Blessed One has passed away, Vāseṭṭhā, now is the time you think fit.

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando āyasmato anuruddhassa paṭissutvā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya attadutiyo kusināraṁ pāvisi.

Yes, venerable sir, replied Venerable Ānanda to Venerable Anuruddha, and having dressed in the morning, taking his bowl and robe, he entered Kusinārā with a companion.

Tena kho pana samayena kosinārakā mallā sandhāgāre sannipatitā honti teneva karaṇīyena.

At that time, the Mallas of Kusinārā were gathered in the assembly hall for some business.

Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ sandhāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ ārocesi: “parinibbuto, vāseṭṭhā, bhagavā, yassadāni kālaṁ maññathā”ti. Idamāyasmato ānandassa vacanaṁ sutvā mallā ca mallaputtā ca mallasuṇisā ca mallapajāpatiyo ca aghāvino dummanā cetodukkhasamappitā appekacce kese pakiriya kandanti, bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti: “atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antarahito”ti. 37.

Then Venerable Ānanda approached the assembly hall of the Mallas of Kusinārā and informed them, The Blessed One has passed away, Vāseṭṭhā, now is the time you think fit.

Hearing Venerable Ānanda's words, the Mallas, their sons, daughters-in-law, and wives, overwhelmed with sorrow and grief, some tore their hair, wept, raised their arms, fell down, rolled about, and lamented, The Blessed One has passed away too soon, the Well-Gone One has passed away too soon, the Eye of the world has disappeared too soon.

Then the Mallas of Kusinārā ordered their men, Come, gather all the perfumes and garlands in Kusinārā and all the musicians.

Buddhasarīrapūjā Atha kho kosinārakā mallā purise āṇāpesuṁ: “tena hi, bhaṇe, kusinārāyaṁ gandhamālañca sabbañca tāḷāvacaraṁ sannipātethā”ti.

Then the Mallas of Kusinārā, taking perfumes, garlands, and five hundred sets of cloth, went to the Sāla grove of the Mallas, where the body of the Blessed One lay.

Atha kho kosinārakā mallā gandhamālañca sabbañca tāḷāvacaraṁ pañca ca dussayugasatāni ādāya yena upavattanaṁ mallānaṁ sālavanaṁ, yena bhagavato sarīraṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavato sarīraṁ naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkarontā garuṁ karontā mānentā pūjentā celavitānāni karontā maṇḍalamāḷe paṭiyādentā ekadivasaṁ vītināmesuṁ. Atha kho kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ etadahosi: “ativikālo kho ajja bhagavato sarīraṁ jhāpetuṁ, sve dāni mayaṁ bhagavato sarīraṁ jhāpessāmā”ti.

They honored, revered, and venerated the body of the Blessed One with dances, songs, music, garlands, and perfumes, and they prepared canopies and pavilions, spending one day in this way.

Atha kho kosinārakā mallā bhagavato sarīraṁ naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkarontā garuṁ karontā mānentā pūjentā celavitānāni karontā maṇḍalamāḷe paṭiyādentā dutiyampi divasaṁ vītināmesuṁ, tatiyampi divasaṁ vītināmesuṁ, catutthampi divasaṁ vītināmesuṁ, pañcamampi divasaṁ vītināmesuṁ, chaṭṭhampi divasaṁ vītināmesuṁ.

Then it occurred to the Mallas of Kusinārā, It is too late today to cremate the body of the Blessed One; tomorrow we will cremate the body of the Blessed One.

Then the Mallas of Kusinārā honored, revered, and venerated the body of the Blessed One with dances, songs, music, garlands, and perfumes, and they prepared canopies and pavilions, spending a second day in this way, a third day, a fourth day, a fifth day, and a sixth day.

Atha kho sattamaṁ divasaṁ kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ etadahosi: “mayaṁ bhagavato sarīraṁ naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkarontā garuṁ karontā mānentā pūjentā dakkhiṇena dakkhiṇaṁ nagarassa haritvā bāhirena bāhiraṁ dakkhiṇato nagarassa bhagavato sarīraṁ jhāpessāmā”ti.

Then, on the seventh day, the Mallas of Kusinara thought, We will honor, revere, and pay homage to the Blessed One's body with dances, songs, music, garlands, and perfumes, and then, carrying it southward through the southern gate of the city, we will cremate the Blessed One's body outside the city to the south.

Tena kho pana samayena aṭṭha mallapāmokkhā sīsaṁnhātā ahatāni vatthāni nivatthā: “mayaṁ bhagavato sarīraṁ uccāressāmā”ti na sakkonti uccāretuṁ.

At that time, the eight chief Mallas, having bathed their heads and donned clean garments, attempted to lift the Blessed One's body but were unable to do so.

Atha kho kosinārakā mallā āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ etadavocuṁ: “ko nu kho, bhante anuruddha, hetu ko paccayo, yenime aṭṭha mallapāmokkhā sīsaṁnhātā ahatāni vatthāni nivatthā: ‘mayaṁ bhagavato sarīraṁ uccāressāmā’ti na sakkonti uccāretun”ti?

Then the Mallas of Kusinara approached the Venerable Anuruddha and asked, Venerable Anuruddha, what is the reason, what is the cause, that these eight chief Mallas, having bathed their heads and donned clean garments, are unable to lift the Blessed One's body?

“Aññathā kho, vāseṭṭhā, tumhākaṁ adhippāyo, aññathā devatānaṁ adhippāyo”ti.

Vasetthas, your intention is one thing, but the intention of the deities is another.

“Kathaṁ pana, bhante, devatānaṁ adhippāyo”ti?

But, Venerable, what is the intention of the deities?

“Tumhākaṁ kho, vāseṭṭhā, adhippāyo: ‘mayaṁ bhagavato sarīraṁ naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkarontā garuṁ karontā mānentā pūjentā dakkhiṇena dakkhiṇaṁ nagarassa haritvā bāhirena bāhiraṁ dakkhiṇato nagarassa bhagavato sarīraṁ jhāpessāmā’ti; devatānaṁ kho, vāseṭṭhā, adhippāyo: ‘mayaṁ bhagavato sarīraṁ dibbehi naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkarontā garuṁ karontā mānentā pūjentā uttarena uttaraṁ nagarassa haritvā uttarena dvārena nagaraṁ pavesetvā majjhena majjhaṁ nagarassa haritvā puratthimena dvārena nikkhamitvā puratthimato nagarassa makuṭabandhanaṁ nāma mallānaṁ cetiyaṁ ettha bhagavato sarīraṁ jhāpessāmā’”ti.

Vasetthas, your intention is to honor, revere, and pay homage to the Blessed One's body with dances, songs, music, garlands, and perfumes, and then, carrying it southward through the southern gate of the city, to cremate it outside the city to the south. However, the intention of the deities is to honor, revere, and pay homage to the Blessed One's body with divine dances, songs, music, garlands, and perfumes, and then, carrying it northward through the northern gate of the city, to bring it into the city, carry it through the center of the city, exit through the eastern gate, and cremate it at the Mallas shrine called Makutabandhana to the east of the city.

“Yathā, bhante, devatānaṁ adhippāyo, tathā hotū”ti.

Let it be, Venerable, as the deities intend.

Tena kho pana samayena kusinārā yāva sandhisamalasaṅkaṭīrā jaṇṇumattena odhinā mandāravapupphehi santhatā hoti.

At that time, Kusinara was covered knee-deep with Mandarava flowers, from the crossroads to the thresholds of the houses.

Atha kho devatā ca kosinārakā ca mallā bhagavato sarīraṁ dibbehi ca mānusakehi ca naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkarontā garuṁ karontā mānentā pūjentā uttarena uttaraṁ nagarassa haritvā uttarena dvārena nagaraṁ pavesetvā majjhena majjhaṁ nagarassa haritvā puratthimena dvārena nikkhamitvā puratthimato nagarassa makuṭabandhanaṁ nāma mallānaṁ cetiyaṁ ettha ca bhagavato sarīraṁ nikkhipiṁsu.

Then the deities and the Mallas of Kusinara, honoring, revering, and paying homage to the Blessed One's body with both divine and human dances, songs, music, garlands, and perfumes, carried it northward through the northern gate of the city, brought it into the city, carried it through the center of the city, exited through the eastern gate, and placed it at the Mallas shrine called Makutabandhana to the east of the city.

Atha kho kosinārakā mallā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavocuṁ: “kathaṁ mayaṁ, bhante ānanda, tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjāmā”ti?

Then the Mallas of Kusinara approached the Venerable Ananda and said... How should we, Venerable Ānanda, proceed with the body of the Tathāgata?

“Yathā kho, vāseṭṭhā, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjanti, evaṁ tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjitabban”ti.

Just as, Vāseṭṭhā, they proceed with the body of a universal monarch, so should they proceed with the body of the Tathāgata.

“Kathaṁ pana, bhante ānanda, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjantī”ti?

But how, Venerable Ānanda, do they proceed with the body of a universal monarch?

“Rañño, vāseṭṭhā, cakkavattissa sarīraṁ ahatena vatthena veṭhenti, ahatena vatthena veṭhetvā vihatena kappāsena veṭhenti, vihatena kappāsena veṭhetvā ahatena vatthena veṭhenti.

Vāseṭṭhā, they wrap the body of a universal monarch with an unworn cloth, then wrap it with teased cotton, and again with an unworn cloth.

Etena upāyena pañcahi yugasatehi rañño cakkavattissa sarīraṁ veṭhetvā āyasāya teladoṇiyā pakkhipitvā aññissā āyasāya doṇiyā paṭikujjitvā sabbagandhānaṁ citakaṁ karitvā rañño cakkavattissa sarīraṁ jhāpenti.

In this manner, they wrap the body of a universal monarch with five hundred layers, place it in an iron oil vessel, cover it with another iron vessel, and then build a pyre of all kinds of fragrant substances to cremate the body of the universal monarch.

Cātumahāpathe rañño cakkavattissa thūpaṁ karonti.

At the crossroads, they construct a stupa for the universal monarch.

Evaṁ kho, vāseṭṭhā, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjanti.

In this way, Vāseṭṭhā, they proceed with the body of a universal monarch.

Yathā kho, vāseṭṭhā, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjanti, evaṁ tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjitabbaṁ.

Just as they proceed with the body of a universal monarch, so should they proceed with the body of the Tathāgata.

Cātumahāpathe tathāgatassa thūpo kātabbo.

A stupa should be constructed at the crossroads for the Tathāgata.

Tattha ye mālaṁ vā gandhaṁ vā cuṇṇakaṁ vā āropessanti vā abhivādessanti vā cittaṁ vā pasādessanti, tesaṁ taṁ bhavissati dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.

Those who place flowers, incense, or powder there, or who pay homage or develop a serene mind, it will be for their long-lasting welfare and happiness.

Atha kho kosinārakā mallā purise āṇāpesuṁ: “tena hi, bhaṇe, mallānaṁ vihataṁ kappāsaṁ sannipātethā”ti.

Then the Mallas of Kusinārā instructed their men, Well then, gather the teased cotton of the Mallas.

Atha kho kosinārakā mallā bhagavato sarīraṁ ahatena vatthena veṭhetvā vihatena kappāsena veṭhesuṁ, vihatena kappāsena veṭhetvā ahatena vatthena veṭhesuṁ.

Then the Mallas of Kusinārā wrapped the Blessed One's body with an unworn cloth, then with teased cotton, and again with an unworn cloth.

Etena upāyena pañcahi yugasatehi bhagavato sarīraṁ veṭhetvā āyasāya teladoṇiyā pakkhipitvā aññissā āyasāya doṇiyā paṭikujjitvā sabbagandhānaṁ citakaṁ karitvā bhagavato sarīraṁ citakaṁ āropesuṁ. 38.

In this manner, they wrapped the Blessed One's body with five hundred layers, placed it in an iron oil vessel, covered it with another iron vessel, and built a pyre of all kinds of fragrant substances to place the Blessed One's body on the pyre.

Mahākassapattheravatthu Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā mahākassapo pāvāya kusināraṁ addhānamaggappaṭipanno hoti mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi.

At that time, the Venerable Mahākassapa was traveling on the road from Pāvā to Kusinārā with a large community of disciples, about five hundred disciples.

Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle nisīdi.

Then the Venerable Mahākassapa, having left the road, sat down at the foot of a certain tree.

Tena kho pana samayena aññataro ājīvako kusinārāya mandāravapupphaṁ gahetvā pāvaṁ addhānamaggappaṭipanno hoti.

At that time, a certain ascetic was traveling on the road from Kusinārā to Pāvā, carrying a mandārava flower.

Addasā kho āyasmā mahākassapo taṁ ājīvakaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ, disvā taṁ ājīvakaṁ etadavoca: “apāvuso, amhākaṁ satthāraṁ jānāsī”ti?

The Venerable Mahākassapa saw the ascetic approaching from afar and said to him, Friend, do you know our teacher? Yes, friend, I know.

“Āmāvuso, jānāmi, ajja sattāhaparinibbuto samaṇo gotamo.

Today, the ascetic Gotama has attained final Nibbāna seven days ago.

Tato me idaṁ mandāravapupphaṁ gahitan”ti.

Then I took this mandārava flower.

Tattha ye te bhikkhū avītarāgā appekacce bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti: “atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antarahito”ti.

There, some of the disciples who were not free from passion raised their arms and wept, fell down, rolled about, and lamented, The Blessed One has attained final Nibbāna too soon, the Well-Gone One has attained final Nibbāna too soon, the Eye of the world has disappeared too soon.

Ye pana te bhikkhū vītarāgā, te satā sampajānā adhivāsenti: “aniccā saṅkhārā, taṁ kutettha labbhā”ti.

However, those disciples who were free from passion endured mindfully and with full awareness, saying, Formations are impermanent; what can be done here?

Tena kho pana samayena subhaddo nāma vuddhapabbajito tassaṁ parisāyaṁ nisinno hoti.

At that time, a certain elder disciple named Subhadda was sitting in that assembly.

Atha kho subhaddo vuddhapabbajito te bhikkhū etadavoca: “alaṁ, āvuso, mā socittha, mā paridevittha, sumuttā mayaṁ tena mahāsamaṇena.

Then Subhadda, the elder disciple, addressed the disciples, saying, Enough, friends, do not grieve, do not lament. We are well liberated by that great ascetic.

Upaddutā ca homa: ‘idaṁ vo kappati, idaṁ vo na kappatī’ti.

We were troubled by him, This is allowable for you, this is not allowable for you.

Idāni pana mayaṁ yaṁ icchissāma, taṁ karissāma, yaṁ na icchissāma, na taṁ karissāmā”ti.

Now we will do as we wish, and what we do not wish, we will not do.

Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo bhikkhū āmantesi: “alaṁ, āvuso, mā socittha, mā paridevittha.

Then the Venerable Mahākassapa addressed the disciples, saying, Enough, friends, do not grieve, do not lament.

Nanu etaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā paṭikacceva akkhātaṁ: ‘sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo aññathābhāvo’.

Was it not declared by the Blessed One, Separation, parting, and change are inherent in all that is dear and pleasing?

Taṁ kutettha, āvuso, labbhā.

What can be done here, friends?

‘Yaṁ taṁ jātaṁ bhūtaṁ saṅkhataṁ palokadhammaṁ, taṁ tathāgatassāpi sarīraṁ mā palujjī’ti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī”ti.

It is not possible that what is born, come into being, conditioned, and subject to decay should not decay, even for the Tathāgata's body.

Tena kho pana samayena cattāro mallapāmokkhā sīsaṁnhātā ahatāni vatthāni nivatthā: “mayaṁ bhagavato citakaṁ āḷimpessāmā”ti na sakkonti āḷimpetuṁ.

At that time, four leading Mallas, having washed their heads and donned clean garments, were unable to light the funeral pyre of the Blessed One.

Atha kho kosinārakā mallā āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ etadavocuṁ: “ko nu kho, bhante anuruddha, hetu ko paccayo, yenime cattāro mallapāmokkhā sīsaṁnhātā ahatāni vatthāni nivatthā: ‘mayaṁ bhagavato citakaṁ āḷimpessāmā’ti na sakkonti āḷimpetun”ti?

Then the Mallas of Kusinārā addressed the Venerable Anuruddha, saying, What is the reason, Venerable Anuruddha, what is the cause, that these four leading Mallas, having washed their heads and donned clean garments, are unable to light the Blessed One's funeral pyre?

“Aññathā kho, vāseṭṭhā, devatānaṁ adhippāyo”ti.

It is otherwise, Vāseṭṭhā, the intention of the deities, he replied.

“Kathaṁ pana, bhante, devatānaṁ adhippāyo”ti?

But how, Venerable, is it the intention of the deities?

“Devatānaṁ kho, vāseṭṭhā, adhippāyo: ‘ayaṁ āyasmā mahākassapo pāvāya kusināraṁ addhānamaggappaṭipanno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi. Na tāva bhagavato citako pajjalissati, yāvāyasmā mahākassapo bhagavato pāde sirasā na vandissatī’”ti.

The intention of the deities, Vāseṭṭhā, is that the Venerable Mahākassapa, who is traveling on the road from Pāvā to Kusinārā with a large assembly of disciples, about five hundred disciples, should first pay homage with his head at the feet of the Blessed One. Only then will the funeral pyre of the Blessed One be lit.

“Yathā, bhante, devatānaṁ adhippāyo, tathā hotū”ti.

Let it be as the intention of the deities, Venerable, they said.

Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo yena kusinārā makuṭabandhanaṁ nāma mallānaṁ cetiyaṁ, yena bhagavato citako tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekaṁsaṁ cīvaraṁ katvā añjaliṁ paṇāmetvā tikkhattuṁ citakaṁ padakkhiṇaṁ katvā bhagavato pāde sirasā vandi.

Then the Venerable Mahākassapa approached the Mallas shrine called Makuṭabandhana in Kusinārā, where the funeral pyre of the Blessed One was. Having approached, he arranged his robe over one shoulder, raised his joined hands in reverence, circumambulated the pyre three times, and paid homage with his head at the feet of the Blessed One.

Tānipi kho pañcabhikkhusatāni ekaṁsaṁ cīvaraṁ katvā añjaliṁ paṇāmetvā tikkhattuṁ citakaṁ padakkhiṇaṁ katvā bhagavato pāde sirasā vandiṁsu.

The five hundred disciples, having arranged their robes over one shoulder, raised their hands in reverence, and circumambulated the funeral pyre three times, then bowed their heads at the feet of the Blessed One.

Vandite ca panāyasmatā mahākassapena tehi ca pañcahi bhikkhusatehi sayameva bhagavato citako pajjali.

After venerating, the Venerable Mahākassapa and the five hundred disciples, the pyre of the Blessed One ignited by itself.

Jhāyamānassa kho pana bhagavato sarīrassa yaṁ ahosi chavīti vā cammanti vā maṁsanti vā nhārūti vā lasikāti vā, tassa neva chārikā paññāyittha, na masi; sarīrāneva avasissiṁsu.

As the body of the Blessed One was burning, there was no trace of skin, hide, flesh, sinews, or marrow left; no ash or soot was visible, only the bones remained.

Seyyathāpi nāma sappissa vā telassa vā jhāyamānassa neva chārikā paññāyati, na masi; evameva bhagavato sarīrassa jhāyamānassa yaṁ ahosi chavīti vā cammanti vā maṁsanti vā nhārūti vā lasikāti vā, tassa neva chārikā paññāyittha, na masi; sarīrāneva avasissiṁsu.

Just as when ghee or oil is burning, no ash or soot is visible, similarly, as the body of the Blessed One was burning, there was no trace of skin, hide, flesh, sinews, or marrow left; no ash or soot was visible, only the bones remained.

Tesañca pañcannaṁ dussayugasatānaṁ dveva dussāni na ḍayhiṁsu yañca sabbaabbhantarimaṁ yañca bāhiraṁ.

Of the five hundred pairs of robes, only two were not burned, the innermost and the outermost.

Daḍḍhe ca kho pana bhagavato sarīre antalikkhā udakadhārā pātubhavitvā bhagavato citakaṁ nibbāpesi.

When the body of the Blessed One was consumed, streams of water appeared from the sky and extinguished the pyre of the Blessed One.

Udakasālatopi abbhunnamitvā bhagavato citakaṁ nibbāpesi.

Water also rose from the Sala trees and extinguished the pyre of the Blessed One.

Kosinārakāpi mallā sabbagandhodakena bhagavato citakaṁ nibbāpesuṁ.

The Mallas of Kusinārā extinguished the pyre of the Blessed One with all kinds of fragrant water.

Atha kho kosinārakā mallā bhagavato sarīrāni sattāhaṁ sandhāgāre sattipañjaraṁ karitvā dhanupākāraṁ parikkhipāpetvā naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkariṁsu garuṁ kariṁsu mānesuṁ pūjesuṁ.

Then the Mallas of Kusinārā, for seven days, honored, revered, and worshipped the remains of the Blessed One in the assembly hall, surrounding them with a fence of spears and a wall of bows, with dances, songs, music, garlands, and perfumes.

39. Sarīradhātuvibhajana Assosi kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti. Atha kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesi: “bhagavāpi khattiyo ahampi khattiyo, ahampi arahāmi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, ahampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmī”ti.

Hearing that the Blessed One had passed away in Kusinārā,

King Ajātasattu of Magadha, son of the Vedehi, sent a messenger to the Mallas of Kusinārā, saying, The Blessed One was a noble, and I am a noble; I am worthy of a share of the Blessed One's relics, and I will build a stupa and a great monument for the Blessed One. The Licchavīs of Vesālī,

Assosuṁ kho vesālikā licchavī: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti. Atha kho vesālikā licchavī kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesuṁ: “bhagavāpi khattiyo mayampi khattiyā, mayampi arahāma bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, mayampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmā”ti.

upon hearing that the Blessed One had passed away in Kusinārā, sent a messenger to the Mallas of Kusinārā, saying, The Blessed One was a noble, and we are nobles; we are worthy of a share of the Blessed One's relics, and we will build a stupa and a great monument for the Blessed One. The Sakyans of Kapilavatthu,

Assosuṁ kho kapilavatthuvāsī sakyā: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti. Atha kho kapilavatthuvāsī sakyā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesuṁ: “bhagavā amhākaṁ ñātiseṭṭho, mayampi arahāma bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, mayampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmā”ti.

upon hearing that the Blessed One had passed away in Kusinārā, sent a messenger to the Mallas of Kusinārā, saying, The Blessed One was our chief relative; we are worthy of a share of the Blessed One's relics, and we will build a stupa and a great monument for the Blessed One. The Allakappa Bulis,

Assosuṁ kho allakappakā bulayo: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti.

heard, The Blessed One has passed away in Kusinara.

Atha kho allakappakā bulayo kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesuṁ: “bhagavāpi khattiyo mayampi khattiyā, mayampi arahāma bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, mayampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmā”ti.

Then the Allakappa Bulis sent a messenger to the Mallas of Kusinara, saying, The Blessed One was a Kshatriya, and we too are Kshatriyas. We deserve a share of the Blessed One's relics, and we will also build a stupa and a monument for the Blessed One.

Assosuṁ kho rāmagāmakā koḷiyā: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti.

The Koliyas of Ramagama,

heard, The Blessed One has passed away in Kusinara.

Atha kho rāmagāmakā koḷiyā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesuṁ: “bhagavāpi khattiyo mayampi khattiyā, mayampi arahāma bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, mayampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmā”ti.

Then the Koliyas of Ramagama sent a messenger to the Mallas of Kusinara, saying, The Blessed One was a Kshatriya, and we too are Kshatriyas. We deserve a share of the Blessed One's relics, and we will also build a stupa and a monument for the Blessed One.

Assosi kho veṭṭhadīpako brāhmaṇo: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti.

The Brahmin of Vethadipa,

heard, The Blessed One has passed away in Kusinara.

Atha kho veṭṭhadīpako brāhmaṇo kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesi: “bhagavāpi khattiyo ahampismi brāhmaṇo, ahampi arahāmi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, ahampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmī”ti.

Then the Brahmin of Vethadipa sent a messenger to the Mallas of Kusinara, saying, The Blessed One was a Kshatriya, and I am a Brahmin. I deserve a share of the Blessed One's relics, and I will also build a stupa and a monument for the Blessed One.

Assosuṁ kho pāveyyakā mallā: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti.

The Paveyyaka Mallas heard, The Blessed One has passed away in Kusinara.

Atha kho pāveyyakā mallā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesuṁ: “bhagavāpi khattiyo mayampi khattiyā, mayampi arahāma bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, mayampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmā”ti.

Then the Paveyyaka Mallas sent a messenger to the Mallas of Kusinara, saying, The Blessed One was a Kshatriya, and we too are Kshatriyas. We deserve a share of the Blessed One's relics, and we will also build a stupa and a monument for the Blessed One.

Evaṁ vutte, kosinārakā mallā te saṅghe gaṇe etadavocuṁ: “bhagavā amhākaṁ gāmakkhette parinibbuto, na mayaṁ dassāma bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgan”ti.

Upon hearing this, the Mallas of Kusinara said to the assembly, The Blessed One passed away in our village territory; we will not give a share of the Blessed One's relics.

Evaṁ vutte, doṇo brāhmaṇo te saṅghe gaṇe etadavoca: “Suṇantu bhonto mama ekavācaṁ, Amhāka buddho ahu khantivādo; Na hi sādhu yaṁ uttamapuggalassa, Sarīrabhāge siyā sampahāro.

Hearing this, the Brahmin Dona addressed the assembly, saying, Listen, sirs, to my single word. Our Tathāgata was an advocate of patience; it is not good that there should be conflict over the relics of the supreme person.

Sabbeva bhonto sahitā samaggā, Sammodamānā karomaṭṭhabhāge; Vitthārikā hontu disāsu thūpā, Bahū janā cakkhumato pasannā”ti.

Let us all be united and harmonious, and divide the relics into equal parts. Let stupas be built in all directions, and many people will be devoted to the Enlightened One.

“Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, tvaññeva bhagavato sarīrāni aṭṭhadhā samaṁ savibhattaṁ vibhajāhī”ti.

Then, Brahmin, you yourself divide the Blessed One's relics into eight equal parts.

“Evaṁ, bho”ti kho doṇo brāhmaṇo tesaṁ saṅghānaṁ gaṇānaṁ paṭissutvā bhagavato sarīrāni aṭṭhadhā samaṁ suvibhattaṁ vibhajitvā te saṅghe gaṇe etadavoca: “imaṁ me bhonto tumbaṁ dadantu ahampi tumbassa thūpañca mahañca karissāmī”ti.

Very well, sirs, replied the Brahmin Dona to the assembly, and having divided the Blessed One's relics into eight equal parts, he said to the assembly, Give me this urn, and I too will build a stupa and a monument for it.

Adaṁsu kho te doṇassa brāhmaṇassa tumbaṁ.

They gave the urn to the Brahmin Dona.

Assosuṁ kho pippalivaniyā moriyā: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti.

The Moriyas of Pipphalivana heard, The Blessed One has passed away in Kusinara.

Atha kho pippalivaniyā moriyā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesuṁ: “bhagavāpi khattiyo mayampi khattiyā, mayampi arahāma bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, mayampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmā”ti.

Then the Moriyas of Pipphalivana sent a messenger to the Mallas of Kusinara. The Blessed One was a noble, and we too are nobles. We too deserve a share of the Blessed One's relics. We too will make a stupa and a great monument for the Blessed One's relics.

“Natthi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgo, vibhattāni bhagavato sarīrāni.

There is no share of the Blessed One's relics left; the Blessed One's relics have been distributed.

Ito aṅgāraṁ harathā”ti.

Take the embers from here.

Te tato aṅgāraṁ hariṁsu. 40.

They took the embers from there.

Dhātuthūpapūjā Atha kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto rājagahe bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akāsi.

King Ajātasattu, son of Queen Videhi, in Rājagaha, made a stupa and a great monument for the Blessed One's relics.

Vesālikāpi licchavī vesāliyaṁ bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akaṁsu.

The Licchavis of Vesālī also made a stupa and a great monument for the Blessed One's relics in Vesālī.

Kapilavatthuvāsīpi sakyā kapilavatthusmiṁ bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akaṁsu.

The Sakyans of Kapilavatthu made a stupa and a great monument for the Blessed One's relics in Kapilavatthu.

Allakappakāpi bulayo allakappe bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akaṁsu.

The Bulis of Allakappa made a stupa and a great monument for the Blessed One's relics in Allakappa.

Rāmagāmakāpi koḷiyā rāmagāme bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akaṁsu.

The Koliyas of Rāmagāma made a stupa and a great monument for the Blessed One's relics in Rāmagāma.

Veṭṭhadīpakopi brāhmaṇo veṭṭhadīpe bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akāsi.

The Brahmin of Veṭṭhadīpa made a stupa and a great monument for the Blessed One's relics in Veṭṭhadīpa.

Pāveyyakāpi mallā pāvāyaṁ bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akaṁsu.

The Mallas of Pāvā made a stupa and a great monument for the Blessed One's relics in Pāvā.

Kosinārakāpi mallā kusinārāyaṁ bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akaṁsu.

The Mallas of Kusinārā made a stupa and a great monument for the Blessed One's relics in Kusinārā.

Doṇopi brāhmaṇo tumbassa thūpañca mahañca akāsi.

The Brahmin Doṇa made a stupa and a great monument for the urn.

Pippalivaniyāpi moriyā pippalivane aṅgārānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akaṁsu.

The Moriyas of Pippalivana made a stupa and a great monument for the embers in Pippalivana.

Iti aṭṭha sarīrathūpā navamo tumbathūpo dasamo aṅgārathūpo.

Thus, there were eight stupas for the relics, the ninth for the urn, and the tenth for the embers.

Evametaṁ bhūtapubbanti.

This is how it was in the past.

Aṭṭhadoṇaṁ cakkhumato sarīraṁ, Sattadoṇaṁ jambudīpe mahenti; Ekañca doṇaṁ purisavaruttamassa, Rāmagāme nāgarājā maheti.

Eight measures of the Enlightened One's body, Seven measures are honored in Jambudīpa;

One measure of the supreme man's relics,

The Nāga King honors in Rāmagāma.

Ekāhi dāṭhā tidivehi pūjitā, Ekā pana gandhārapure mahīyati; Kāliṅgarañño vijite punekaṁ, Ekaṁ pana nāgarājā maheti.

One tooth is worshiped in the heavenly realms,

Another is honored in Gandhāra city;

One is in the domain of the Kaliṅga king,

And another is honored by the Nāga King.

Tasseva tejena ayaṁ vasundharā, Āyāgaseṭṭhehi mahī alaṅkatā; Evaṁ imaṁ cakkhumato sarīraṁ, Susakkataṁ sakkatasakkatehi.

By his power, this earth is adorned with the best of offerings;

Thus, the body of the Enlightened One is well-honored,

Revered by the well-revered.

Devindanāgindanarindapūjito, Manussindaseṭṭhehi tatheva pūjito; Taṁ vandatha pañjalikā labhitvā, Buddho have kappasatehi dullabhoti.

Worshiped by the lord of gods, the lord of nāgas, and the lord of men,

Likewise worshiped by the best of human kings;

Bow down with joined palms, having obtained it,

Cattālīsa samā dantā, kesā lomā ca sabbaso; Devā hariṁsu ekekaṁ, cakkavāḷaparamparāti.

For a Tathāgata is indeed rare for hundreds of eons.

Forty years, teeth, hair, and all body hair;

The gods took one each, across the world systems.

Mahāparinibbānasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.

The Great Parinibbāna Sutta is completed.